Navis N4
Cargo Manual
Administrator and User Guide
3.6.34
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF Navis LLC
UNAUTHORIZED USE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
N4 is a trademark of Navis LLC.
© Navis LLC 1988 - 2021. All rights reserved.
This help has been made available as part of the license that has been granted to an authorized user of Navis
LLC software. Use of this documentation is subject to the terms and limitations of that license agreement. This
documentation describes all functionality that can be licensed for this product. Not all functionality described in
this documentation may be available to you depending on your license agreement. If you are not aware of the
relevant terms of your license agreement, contact sales at Navis LLC. This document is protected by copyright
and by the licensee’s agreement to maintain the confidentiality of the content of this document as provided in
the license agreement for the software.
Liability Disclaimer
Navis LLC takes steps to ensure that its published documentation is correct; however, errors do occur. Navis
LLC reserves the right to correct any such errors and disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
Navis LLC
55 Harrison Street, Suite 600
Oakland CA 94607 USA
www.navis.com
Tel: +1 510 267 5000
Fax: +1 510 267 5100
Contents
Contents
Part 1 Cargo Overview and Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cargo Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Part 2 Cargo Setup and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1 Cargo Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2.1.1 Commodities view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1.1.1 Commodity form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1.1.2 Commodity icon reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.1.1.3 Assign Commodity Archetype form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
2.1.2 Special Stows view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
2.1.2.1 Special Stow form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1.3 Hazard Placards view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2.1.3.1 Hazard Placard form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.4 Hazard Fire Code view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.4.1 Fire Code form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.1.5 Package Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
2.1.5.1 Package Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.6 Product Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.6.1 Product Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2.1.7 Hazardous Goods view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.1.7.1 Hazardous Goods form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.7.2 Hazardous Goods Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.1.8 Cargo Damage Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.8.1 Cargo Damage Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2.2 Cargo Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2.2.1 Bill of Lading settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
INVBL002 (BILLS_OF_LADING_FOR_ALL_IMPORT_EMPTIES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2.2 Cargo Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CGOCargoRelease001 (RELEASE_BY_QTY_FLAGTYPE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CGOCargoValidation001 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_LINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CGOCargoValidation002 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CGOCargoValidation003 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
CGOCargoValidation004 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_CARRIER_VISIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
INVMOBILE_RDT005 (MOBILE_CARGO_INVENTORY_POPULATE_QTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
3
Contents
ROADGATE034 (CARGO_BL_LOV_FILTER). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
xpscacheCARGO001 (CARGO_XPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.3 Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.3.1 N4 Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.3.2 N4 Mobile Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Part 3 Cargo Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.1 Bills of Lading view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.1.1 Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3.1.1.1 Items tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.1.1.2 Units tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.1.2 Bill of Lading Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.1.2.1 Details pane in the Bill of Lading Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.1.3 Copy Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.1.4 Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2 Delivery Orders view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.2.1 Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.2.1.1 Contact Details form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.1.2 Order Item tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.2 Cancel Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.3 Delivery Order Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.3.1 Delivery Order Inspector Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.3.2 Details pane in the Deliver Order Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.3 Cargo Lots view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.3.1 Cargo Lot Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.3.1.1 Details pane in the Cargo Lot Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.3.2 Edit Cargo Lot form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
3.3.3 Cargo Stuff form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.3.4 Cargo Strip form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3.3.5 Cargo Move form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3.6 Create Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.3.7 Create Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.3.8 Cargo Discharge form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.3.9 Cargo De-Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
3.3.10 Cargo De-Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3.3.11 Cargo Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
3.3.12 Cargo Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3.3.13 Cargo Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.3.14 Manifest Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.3.14.1 Cargo Manifest To Container form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.3.14.2 Cargo Manifest To Vessel form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
4
Contents
3.3.14.3 Cargo Manifest To Rail form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.3.15 Manufacture Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.3.16 Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.3.17 Cargo Transload form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
3.3.18 Cargo Identify form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
3.3.19 Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
3.3.20 Cargo Split BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.3.21 Cargo Re-consign BL from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3.3.22 Damages form (Cargo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
3.4 Pre-Advised Cargo view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Part 4 N4 Mobile Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.1 Cargo Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.1.1 Stuff Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.1.1.1 Stuff - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.1.1.2 Stuff - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
4.1.1.3 Stuff - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.1.2 Strip Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.1.2.1 Strip - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.1.2.2 Strip - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
4.1.2.3 Strip - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.1.3 Vessel Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.1.3.1 Load Vessel - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.1.3.2 Load Vessel - Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.1.3.3 Load Vessel - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.1.4 Vessel UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.1.4.1 Discharge Vessel - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.1.4.2 Vessel UnLoad - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.1.4.3 Discharge Vessel - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.1.5 Truck Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.1.5.1 Load Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
4.1.5.2 Load Cargo - Select Cargo To Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.1.5.3 Load Cargo - Validate Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.1.5.4 Load Cargo - Matching Visits form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.1.5.5 Load Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
4.1.6 Truck UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.1.6.1 UnLoad Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.1.6.2 UnLoad Cargo - Select Cargo To UnLoad form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.1.6.3 UnLoad Cargo - Validate Unload form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.1.6.4 UnLoad Cargo - Matching BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.1.6.5 UnLoad Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
5
Contents
4.1.7 Rail Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.1.7.1 Rail Load - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.1.7.2 Rail Load - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164
4.1.7.3 Rail Load - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.1.8 Rail UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.1.8.1 Unload Rail - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
4.1.8.2 Unload Rail - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.1.8.3 Unload Rail - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
4.1.9 Inspect Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.1.9.1 Inspect - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.1.9.2 Inspect - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.1.9.3 Inspect - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.1.10 Identify Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.1.10.1 Identify Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.1.10.2 Identify Cargo - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.1.10.3 Identify Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.1.11 Record Damages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.1.11.1 Record Damages - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.1.11.2 Record Damages - Validate Record Damage form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
4.1.11.3 Record Damages - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.1.12 Move Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.1.12.1 Move Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.1.12.2 Move Cargo - Quantity and Position form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.1.12.3 Move Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Part 5 Cargo How Do I.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.1 Cargo How Do I.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.1.1 Associate/Disassociate a non-archetype commodity with/from the archetype commodity. . . . . . . . . 177
5.1.2 Cancel a break-bulk gate transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
5.1.3 Configure Holds/Permissions to prevent break-bulk cargo events from being recorded. . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.1.4 Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.1.5 Enter cargo lot Quantity for truck loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
5.1.6 Extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.1.7 Prevent delivering a cargo quantity greater than what's specified in the cargo delivery order. . . . . .
183
5.1.8 Prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing cargo lots for another facility in the complex. . . 183
5.1.9 Prevent getting same bill of lading (BL) in the same Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.1.10 Print barcode labels for the cargo arriving by truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.1.11 Process identified cargo lots using Gate API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
5.1.12 Record a Billable Event Type for a Cargo Lot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5.1.13 Set up Inbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.1.14 Set up Outbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
6
Contents
5.1.15 Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.1.16 Create invoice for multiple cargo lots using the 'generate-invoice-request' API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
7
Part 1
Cargo Overview and Getting
Started
In this Section:
Cargo Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
8
Cargo Overview
Prerequisites
• General Cargo, RDT Cargo Tracking (for accessing the Cargo Inventory program in N4 Mobile), and Bills of Lading
(for creating bill of lading and bill of lading items) licenses.
The General Cargo Option is useful for terminals that handle bulk cargo. This option provides a simple, fast, and
efficient way to manage non-containerized cargo, such as break-bulk, rolling cargo, and bulk cargo.
You can use N4 for cargo setup and configuration and either N4 or N4 Mobile for performing cargo operations.
Cargo Lot Management enables you to track cargo in three basic ways:
• Bulk Cargo
▪ Cargo is tracked by weight or volume, such as coal, wheat, and crude oil.
• Quantified Cargo
▪ Cargo is tracked by quantity. This is sometimes referred to as Pseudo Bulk Cargo. In this case, each piece of
cargo does not have a unique identifier either because the identifier is unknown or because the pieces are too
numerous and interchangeable; therefore, this type of cargo is tracked only by quantity.
• Identified Cargo
▪ Each piece of cargo is tracked by a known and unique identifier, such as the VIN number of a car.
N4 supports the following gate transaction types for break-bulk cargo:
• Deliver Break-Bulk (DB)
• Receive Break-Bulk (RB)
Cargo Operations enables you to perform the following major cargo operations for break-bulk, using either N4 or N4
Mobile. In N4, the options listed in the table below are available in the Actions menu in the Cargo Lots view (on page
96) and in the Cargo Inventory application in N4 Mobile, except the Manifest and Transload options, which can be
done only using N4.
Cargo Operation
Purpose
Manifest
Manifest cargo (on page 130) to a
carrier, such as a vessel or a rail,
or you can manifest cargo to a
container
Stuff Cargo
Stuff cargo (on page 151) lots into
a container
Strip Cargo
Strip cargo (on page 153) lots
from a container
Vessel Load
Load cargo lots to a vessel either
by moving the cargo lot to the yard
or directly onto the vessel
Vessel UnLoad
Unload cargo lots from a vessel
either to the yard or directly onto a
truck
Truck Load
Load cargo lots to a truck
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
9
Part 1: Cargo Overview and Getting Started
Cargo Overview
Truck UnLoad
Unload cargo lots from a truck
Rail Load
Load cargo lots to a train visit
Rail UnLoad
Unload cargo lots from a train visit
Inspect Cargo
Inspect cargo lots
Identify Cargo
Identify cargo lots
Record Damages
Record damages for a cargo lot
Move Cargo
Move cargo lots from one position
to another
Transload Cargo
Transfer cargo lots from a full unit
to an empty unit
Ad hoc pick-up
Deliver break-bulk cargo against
ad hoc truck visits
Key Terms
Ad hoc pick-up
Cargo delivery simplified, and delivered ad hoc.
Break-bulk cargo
General cargo that is conventionally stevedored and stowed (palletized or sling), as opposed to bulk or containerized
cargo.
Bulk cargo
Cargo that is stowed without packaging such as a container, grains and liquids are common examples of bulk cargo.
Non-containerized
Cargo that is not loaded into a container, such as break bulk, dry bulk, liquid bulk, large machinery, or rolling stock. N4
does not currently handle non-containerized cargo.
Identified Lots
Identified cargo lots for a bill of lading item. For example, a car.
Container Freight Station (CFS)
A building where containers are packed and unpacked to consolidate loads from multiple shippers that are shipping
less than a full container load.
Manifest
A summary of all cargo that was loaded onboard a specific vessel (or train) during a specific voyage (or train service).
Manifests are usually broken down by load port, discharge port, transshipment port, and bill of lading number. Often
received via EDI.
Cargo bay
An area that is designated for cargo storage.
Bill of lading (BL)
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
10
Part 1: Cargo Overview and Getting Started
Cargo Overview
A document or a contract between a line operator and a shipper. The bill of lading lists all cargo items received from a
shipper that will be delivered to the consignee named in the contract. It also lists the origin and the destination of the
cargo. One bill of lading can list cargo items that are distributed among several containers. Conversely, one container
can include cargo items from several bills of lading. Each bill of lading relates to a single vessel visit.
Next Step:
Read the Getting Started section. This section provides an overview of the setup and configuration tasks that
you must complete before you perform any cargo operation.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
11
Getting Started
The following tables provide a comprehensive overview of the different setup and configuration tasks you must
complete before you begin performing cargo operations.
Setup
Tasks
Setup / Action
Commodities
Define commodity (on page 18) code. A
commodity code is a site-specific code
indicating the contents of a container.
Example: Cotton, shrimp, electronics, and
clothes.
Special Stows
Define special stow codes (on page 24) as
maintained by your terminal.
Example: A stow code to identify a container
that is out-of-gauge, has a specific temperature
or humidity requirement, or is carrying
hazardous cargo.
Hazard Placards
Define hazard placards (on page 25). The
hazard placards are used as the visual
identification of the hazards associated with a
unit.
Hazard Fire Code
Define hazard fire (on page 27) code. You
can use a hazard fire code to map your local
hazard identification convention to the UN
hazard identifiers, the Hazard Class, and the
UN Number.
Package Types
Define package types (on page 29) for
packaged items manifested on a BL.
Example: Pallet or a barrel.
Product Types
Add product types (on page 31) to define the
type of product for an item. A product type is
the Universal Product Code (UPC) for an item,
such as USGE357 for General Electric product
number 357 sold in the US
Hazardous Goods
Add hazardous goods (on page 33) for your
site. If you have the hazardous goods data as
an XML file based on the snx.xsd, you can
import the initial data for the Hazardous Goods.
Cargo Damage Types
Add cargo damage types (on page 37) to
record a damage against a cargo lot.
Example: Dent.
EDI Configuration
Create the following to import the Manifest EDI
file:
• EDI trading partner.
• EDI mailbox and assign a trading partner to
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
12
Part 1: Cargo Overview and Getting Started
Getting Started
at least one EDI mailbox to send or receive
EDI messages
• A message type and message map for the
required trading partner
• EDI Session. You can also add additional
mailboxes, configure the EDI settings and
EDI filters for the selected EDI session.
Set up EDI messages
Set up the inbound cargo EDI messages (on
page 187).
• The Inbound EDI support for cargo focuses
on the creation of cargo data using the BL,
BL Item, and Cargo Lot information.
Gate
• Configure and set up a gate for cargo
handling
• Configure the gate by adding gate stages,
gate transaction types, and truck visits
Appointment
• Create an appointment stage for a gate
configuration
• Create the appointment transaction types
for bulk cargo
• Add form fields and business tasks for the
transaction types
• Create appointment rule sets and rules
For more information, see Set up
Appointments.
Configuration
Tasks
Setup
Business Tasks
You can include or exclude business tasks in
N4 to configure the gate for the Deliver BreakBulk (DB) and Receive Break-Bulk (RB)
transaction types.
For more information on configuring business
tasks, see Business Tasks form.
For more information on the cargo business
tasks, see Cargo Business Tasks.
Cargo Privileges
Use the Cargo privileges to secure the various
cargo related components in N4 and N4
Mobile.
For more information, see Cargo Privileges (on
page 51).
Cargo Settings
Use the Cargo settings to specify the level of
validation that N4 must implement for the cargo
and bills of lading associated with a container.
For more information, see Cargo Settings (on
page 39).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
13
Part 1: Cargo Overview and Getting Started
Bill of Lading (BL) Settings
Getting Started
Configure the level of BL functionality used fro
your site using the available BL settings.
For more information, see Bill of Lading
settings (on page 39).
For detailed information on setup and configuration, see the Cargo Setup and Configuration chapter.
For process flows that describe how to configure a gate and EDI, see Configuring a Gate and EDI Process flow.
Next step:
If you have completed the setup and configuration tasks, you are ready to perform cargo operations. The
Cargo How Do I section illustrates performing Deliver Break-Bulk and Receive Break-Bulk transactions.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
14
Part 2
Cargo Setup and
Configuration
In this Section:
Cargo Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cargo Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
15
2.1 Cargo Setup
This section describes all the reference data that you need to add and configure as part of cargo management.
Commodities view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Special Stows view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hazard Placards view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hazard Fire Code view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Package Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Product Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Hazardous Goods view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cargo Damage Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
16
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
2.1.1 Commodities view
Configuration
Cargo
Commodities
Commodities view
The Commodities view displays the commodity codes that exist at the current scope level. A commodity code is a
site-specific code indicating the contents of a container, such as cotton, shrimp, electronics, and clothes. Typically,
commodity codes are assigned to exports received at the gate. Some facilities also assign commodity codes to imports
and transships.
A facility uses commodity codes for decking because some commodities tend to get rolled often as exports and some
commodities tend to have long dwell times as imports.
You can add new commodity codes, and edit or delete existing commodity codes from this view.
In addition, you can use the Actions menu to:
• Recover Obsolete: Recover deleted commodities.
• Purge: Purge commodities.
• Export SNX File: Export the selected commodities as an XML file using the snx.xsd format.
• Copy Reference Set: Copy commodities from another entity set.
• Assign Commodity Archetype (on page 22): Add/Update the archetype commodity(s) for the selected nonarchetype commodity(s).
• Remove Commodity Archetype: Remove the archetype commodity(s) assigned to the selected non-archetype
commodity(s).
You cannot purge an archetype commodity, if the commodity is referenced by one or more non-archetype
commodity.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either Advised,
Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/units/containers
have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays an error message,
Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
17
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
Commodities Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Arch
Archetype Commodity
X
X
Archetype?
Is Archetype?
X
X
Changed
Record Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record Changed User
X
X
Cmdy Code
Commodity Code
X
X
Cmdy Id
Commodity ID
X
X
Cmdy Short Name
Commodity Short Name
X
X
Created
Record Create Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create User
X
X
Description
Description
X
X
Exclusive Tower
Is Exclusive Reefer Tower X
X
Film
Is Film
X
X
Food
Is Food
X
X
HazValidation
Validate Hazard
X
X
Heat Sensitive
Is Heat Sensitive
X
X
Humd Req.%
Humidity required, %
X
X
icon1
Icon #1
X
X
icon2
Icon #2
X
X
Life Cycle
Life Cycle State
X
X
Oils
Is Oils
X
X
RngeValidation
Validate Temperature
Range
X
X
Taintable
Is Taintable
X
X
Tainting
Is Tainting
X
X
Temp Ideal
Ideal Temperature (C)
X
X
Temp Max
Maximum Temperature
X
X
Temp Min
Minimum Temperature
X
X
TempValidation
Validate Ideal
Temperature
X
X
UN/NA
UN/NA Identification
Number .
X
X
Valuable
Is Valuables
X
X
VCG Ratio
Vertical Center Of Gravity
Ratio
X
X
2.1.1.1 Commodity form
Configuration
Cargo
Commodities
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Commodities view
Commodity form
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
18
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
The Commodity form enables you to add and edit a commodity code. A commodity code is a site-specific code
indicating the contents of a container. N4 applies rudimentary hazardous information to a container based on its
commodity. You can also define the temperature requirements for refrigerated commodities. When you receive a
container load of one of these commodities, N4 automatically applies the temperature requirements to the container at
the gate.
You can use this form to manually add commodity codes or use the Actions
commodity codes defined in an existing entity set.
Copy Reference Set option to copy
To add or edit a commodity code:
1. In the Commodity ID field, enter an ID that uniquely identifies the commodity.
You can use this code in data entry forms, such as the Booking Items form or the gate forms, to refer to the
commodity.
2. In the Commodity Short Name field, enter a short name for the commodity.
XPS uses a combination of Commodity ID and Commodity Short Name to identify a commodity. If the two values
are same, it displays only the Commodity ID.
3. In the Commodity Code field, enter the commodity code.
XPS displays the first character of the commodity code in the Information dialog.
4. In the Icon #1 field, enter the (background/foreground) reference number for the icon that you want to use to identify
the commodity in XPS.
5. In the Icon #2 field, enter the (background/foreground) reference number for an alternate icon that you want to use
to identify the commodity in XPS.
For more information, see Commodity icon reference. (on page 22)
XPS uses the alternate icon if the first icon is not available.
The Icon #1 and Icon #2 fields default to zero if you do not specify a value.
6. Optionally, use the various check boxes, such as Is Food, Is Film, and Is Oils, to define additional characteristics of
the commodity.
Currently, N4 does not use these check boxes to validate information about the commodity in any other data
entry forms.
7. In the Vertical Center of Gravity Ratio field, enter the vertical center of gravity ratio for the commodity.
To calculate the vertical center of gravity ratio divide the center of gravity of the container by the container height.
The vertical center of gravity ratio must be greater than 0.0 and less than 1.0. The aggregate vertical center of
gravity ratio affects the stability of the vessel.
8. Enter other optional information for the commodity.
9. Click Save.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Commodity form.
Field Label
Description
Description
Enter a short description for the commodity.
Icon
Select a media asset that represents the icon for the
commodity in N4.
The lookup field displays the media assets that exist at
the current scope level. To add a new icon as a media
asset, see Media Assets view.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
19
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Field Label
Is Archetype?
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
Description
Select the check box to indicate that the selected
commodity is the master commodity, that is, one of the
standard commodities that you create in order to
reference non-archetype commodities when you create/
edit them. When you select this, N4 disables the
Archetype drop-down list. You can also select this check
box to convert a non-archetype commodity into an
archetype commodity.
For example, you could have multiple commodity entries
that are very similar, such as "frobeef", "froz beef", "fbeef".
However, all these commodities could be grouped under
a master commodity called FrozenBeef. So if another
commodity is created that is similar to FrozenBeef, then
you can apply the FrozenBeef commodity.
When you attempt to deselect this check box for the
archetype commodity that is referenced by one or more
non-archetype commodity(s), N4 raises an error message
and does not allow you to deselect it.
If you add an Arch Commodity after XPS start-up,
N4 sends this update to XPS only after you apply
one of the subordinate commodities to a
container, which in turn refers to the newly
created Arch Commodity.
Archetype
Select an archetype commodity for the non-archetype
commodity.
The drop-down list lists the archetype commodities that
you created in the current scope level.
Non-reefer only
Select the check box if the commodity cannot be in a live
reefer container.
If you select the Non-reefer only check box for a
commodity, N4 clears and disables the Validate
Temperature Range check box and the Validate
Ideal Temperature check box for the commodity.
Minimum Temperature
Enter the minimum temperature required for the
commodity.
Maximum Temperature
Enter the maximum temperature required for the
commodity.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
20
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Field Label
Validate Temperature Range
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
Description
Select the check box if you want N4 to validate the
temperature range specified for a commodity.
If you select the Validate Temperature Range check
box, the Minimum Temperature field and the Maximum
Temperature field are required fields for the commodity.
To reject a gate transaction if the temperature for
a commodity is not specified or is not within the
range, enter data in at least one of the
temperature related fields, and configure the
RejectCommodityTempRequired and
RejectCommodityTempOutOfRange business
tasks.
Ideal Temperature
Enter the ideal temperature for the commodity.
Validate Ideal Temperature
Select the check box if you want to validate the ideal
temperature for a commodity.
If you select the Validate Ideal Temperature
check box, the Ideal Temperature field is a
required field for the commodity.
UN/NA Identification Number
Enter the UN/NA Identification Number for the commodity.
Validate Hazard
Select the check box if you want to validate the hazard
information for the commodity at the gate.
You must include the
RejectCommodityHazRequired business task
in the gate configuration to reject a gate
transaction and display appropriate error
message for the user at the gate.
Vent Setting, %
Enter the ventilation requirements for the commodity.
To validate the ventilation requirements for a
commodity at the gate, include the
RejectCommodityVentRequired and
RejectCommodityVentIncorrect business
tasks in the gate configuration.
Humidity required, %
Enter the humidity requirements for the commodity.
N4 performs the following validations in any form that contains both the Commodity field and the Temp. Required
field:
• If you select the Non-reefer only check box, entering a value in the Temp. Required field generates an error.
• If you select the Validate Temperature Range check box, the value specified in the Temp. Required field must be
between the values specified in the Minimum Temperature and Maximum Temperature fields for the commodity.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
21
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Commodities view
• If you select the Validate Ideal Temperature check box, the value specified in the Temp. Required field must be
equal to the Ideal Temperature specified for the commodity.
If you do not select any of the check boxes in the Commodity form, N4 does not perform any validations.
The various forms in N4 using the above validations are:
• Add Inbound Train Inventory (Advanced) form
• Booking Item form
• Rail Order Item form
• Stow Plan form
• Unit Details Editor
2.1.1.2 Commodity icon reference
The following table lists the background and foreground reference numbers for the icon that you want to use to identify
the commodity in XPS.
Each icon has a background and foreground code associated with it.The background code represents Icon #1 and the
foreground code represents icon #2. XPS uses the alternate icon (Icon #2) if the first icon (Icon #1) is not available.
For instructions for how to configure commodities, see Commodity form (on page 18).
Background
Codes
Icon #1
Foreground
Codes
Icon #2
Description
1
2
Hides or wet
salted hides
3
4
Cars
5
6
Timber
7
8
Fragile goods
9
10
Beer
11
12
Malt
13
14
Ice Cream
15
16
Onion
17
18
French Fries
2.1.1.3 Assign Commodity Archetype form
Configuration
form
Cargo
Commodities
Commodities view
Actions
Assign Commodity Archetype
Assign Commodity Archetype
The Assign Commodity Archetype form enables you to assign an archetype commodity to one or more nonarchetype commodity(s) selected from the Commodities view (on page 17). If a non-archetype commodity already
has an archetype assigned, you can use this form to update it.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
22
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Special Stows view
To update the archetype commodity of one non-archetype commodity:
1. In the list view, select the non-archetype commodity for which you want to update the archetype commodity.
2. Select the Actions
Assign Commodity Archetype option.
The Assign Archetype Commodity form displays the existing information for the non-archetype commodity.
3. Update the archetype commodity for the selected non-archetype commodity.
4. Click Save.
To update the archetype commodity of multiple non-archetype commodities:
1. In the list view, select the non-archetype commodities for which you want to update the archetype commodity.
2. Select the Actions
Assign Commodity Archetype option.
N4 displays the fields in the Assign Archetype Commodity form as view-only with a check box to the left of each
field label.
3. Select the check box to the left of the field label of the field that you want to edit.
The field becomes editable.
Do not select the check box for a field that you do not want to update for all the selected non-archetype
commodities. If you select a check box and do not enter a value, the field is set to null for all the selected
non-archetype commodities.
4. Select or enter a value in the field.
The updated values apply to all the selected non-archetype commodities.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to update other fields for the selected non-archetype commodities.
Click Save.
When you add or update one or more archetype or non-archetype commodity(s), N4 displays the corresponding
Commodity ID in the Arch field in the Commodities view (on page 17).
2.1.2 Special Stows view
Configuration
Cargo
Special Stows
Special Stows view
The Special Stows view displays the special stow codes that exist at the current scope level. Special stow codes are
assigned to containers with special requirements for loading to a vessel. For example, use special stow codes to
identify a container that is out-of-gauge, has a specific temperature or humidity requirement, or is carrying hazardous
cargo.
There are a few basic stow codes that vessel planners know and follow. For example, ADEK means 'Above Deck', and
the planner knows to plan the container to an above deck stow position. With special stow codes, it is best to have only
a few that everyone understands. Typically, twenty or so stow codes will cover 99% of special stow conditions.
You can add new special stow codes, and edit or delete existing special stow codes from this view.
In addition, you can use the Actions menu to:
• Recover Obsolete: Recover deleted special stows.
• Purge: Purge special stows.
• Copy Reference Set: Copy special stows from another entity set.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
23
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazard Placards view
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Special Stows Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Changed
Record Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record Changed User
X
X
Created
Record Create Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create User
X
X
Description
Description
X
X
ID
ID
X
X
Life Cycle
Life Cycle State
X
X
2.1.2.1 Special Stow form
Configuration
Cargo
Special Stows
Special Stows view
Special Stow form
The Special Stow form enables you to add and edit special stow codes. Special stow codes are usually maintained by
the facility. Use this form to manually add special stow codes or use the Actions Copy Reference Set option to
copy special stow codes defined in an existing entity set.
To add or edit a special stow code:
1. In the ID field, enter an ID that uniquely identifies the special stow, such as ADEK for containers that must be stowed
above deck.
2. In the Description field, enter a description for the special stow.
3. Click Save.
2.1.3 Hazard Placards view
Configuration
Cargo
Hazard Placards
Hazard Placards view
The Hazard Placards view displays the hazard placards that exist at the current scope level. The hazard placards are
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
24
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazard Placards view
used as a visual identification of the hazards associated with a unit. The hazard placards are based on the hazard
class and the packaging group of the hazard.
Most facilities record the hazard placards observed on a container. For more information on adding or updating
hazards for a unit, see Update Hazards form.
You can add new hazard placards, and edit or delete existing hazard placards from this view.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Hazard Placards Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Explanation
Explanation
X
X
Min. Weight
Minimum Weight (kg)
X
X
Placard
Placard
X
X
2.1.3.1 Hazard Placard form
Configuration
Cargo
Hazard Placards
Hazard Placards view
Hazard Placard form
The Hazard Placard form enables you to add and edit hazard placards. The hazard placards are used when defining
the hazards associated with a unit. For more information, see Update Hazards form.
To add or edit a hazard placard:
1. In the Placard field, enter the text that appears on the hazard placard.
2. Optionally, in the Explanation field, enter any additional information for the hazard placard.
3. In the Minimum Weight field, enter the minimum weight required for the hazard placard to be applicable.
To enter weight using a specific unit, type the standard unit symbol, such as lb (pounds), mt (metric ton), lt
(long ton), or st (short ton), immediately after the numeric value. For example, to specify weight in Pounds,
enter 50000 lb in the text field. The symbol for the default unit for a field is displayed as part of the field
label.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
25
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazard Fire Code view
4. Click Save.
2.1.4 Hazard Fire Code view
Configuration
Cargo
Hazard Fire Code
Hazard Fire Code view
The Hazard Fire Code view displays the hazard fire codes that exist at the current scope level. You can use the
hazard fire codes to map your local hazard identification convention to the standard UN hazard identifiers (Hazard
Class and UN Number).
When you add or edit a hazard item, N4 maps the hazard to the corresponding hazard fire code that you define in this
view and displays the hazard fire code in the Hazards form.
N4 also displays the fire hazard code in the Units view and the Contents tab in the Unit Inspector.
You can add, edit, and delete hazard fire codes from this view.
You can also use the Administration
hazard fire code data.
DBA
Import SNX File
SNX Importer form to import an XML file with the
To add a new record:
.
Click
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Hazard Fire Code Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Changed
Changed
X
X
Changer
Changer
X
X
Created
Created
X
X
Creator
Creator
X
X
Description
Description
X
X
Fire Code
Fire Code
X
X
Fire Code Class
Fire Code Class
X
X
IMDG Class
IMDG Class
X
X
UN
UN Number
X
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
26
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazard Fire Code view
2.1.4.1 Fire Code form
Configuration
Cargo
Hazard Fire Code
Hazard Fire Code view
Fire Code form
The Fire Code form enables you to add and edit a hazard fire code. You can use a hazard fire code to map your local
hazard identification convention to the UN hazard identifiers, the Hazard Class and the UN Number.
To add or edit a hazard fire code:
1. From the IMDG Class drop-down list, select a standard IMDG class code that identifies the hazardous material.
2. In the UN Number field, enter the standard UN Number for the hazardous material.
3. In the Fire Code field, enter the hazard fire code according to your local convention.
4. In the Fire Code Class field, enter the local hazardous code class or the premium code.
N4 uses the Fire Code Class to identify the main hazard code and UN number of the hazards associated with a
unit. Each hazardous cargo must be assigned a premium code.
5. Optionally, in the Description field, enter a short description for the hazard fire code.
6. Click Save.
Premium Code
A premium code identifies the severity of the hazard with which it is associated. N4 uses the premium code to
determine the main IMDG hazard class and UN number associated with a unit.
If there is only one hazard associated with a unit, N4 displays the corresponding IMDG class and UN number as the
main hazard and also uses it in the Chargeable Unit events table for billing purposes.
If multiple hazards are associated with a unit:
• N4 selects the hazard with the most severe premium code as the main hazard
• If multiple hazards have the same premium code, N4 selects the heaviest hazardous cargo as the main hazard
For example, if the following hazards are associated with a unit:
IMDG Class
UN Number
Premium
Code
1.2
1234
A
2.2
2345
B
If A represents the premium code for the most severe hazard, N4 assigns the hazard with the IMDG Class 1.2 and UN
number 1234 as the main hazard for the unit.
If the following hazards are associated with a unit:
IMDG Class
UN Number
Hazard Cargo
Weight
Premium Code
1.2
1212
1000 Kg
A
1.3
3443
1500 Kg
A
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
27
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
IMDG Class
4
Cargo Setup
Package Types view
UN Number
9898
Hazard Cargo
Weight
Premium Code
2000 Kg
A
Since all the hazards have the same premium code, N4 selects the hazard with the heaviest cargo weight and assigns
the hazard with the IMDG class 4 and UN number 9898 as the main hazard for the unit.
2.1.5 Package Types view
Configuration
Cargo
Package Types
Package Types view
The Package Types view displays the package types that exist at the current scope level. Use package types to define
the packaged items manifested on a bill of lading, such as a pallet or a barrel. For more information on bill of lading
items, see Bill of Lading Item form (on page 66). N4 uses the information specified for the package type to
automatically fill in the fields in the Bill of Lading Item form.
N4 allows you to associate an icon with the commodity (on page 18), package type (on page 29), and the product
type (on page 31) entities. The precedence of the icon displayed in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101), Bill of
Lading Inspector (on page 74), and the Unit Inspector is as follows:
• Package Type
• Product Type
• Commodity
• Standard Navis Cubes icon
You can add new package type, or edit and delete existing package types from this view.
You cannot delete a package type if it is associated with a bill of lading item.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
28
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Package Types view
Package Types Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Changed
Record Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record Changed User
X
X
Code
UCC/EAN-128 Code
X
X
Created
Record Create Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create User
X
X
Desc
Description
X
X
Id
Id
X
X
2.1.5.1 Package Type form
Configuration
Cargo
Package Types
Package Types view
Package Type form
The Package Type form enables you to add a package type or edit an existing package type. Use package types to
define the packaged items manifested on a bill of lading, such as a pallet or a barrel. For more information on bill of
lading items, see Bill of Lading Item form (on page 66).
N4 allows you to associate an icon with the commodity (on page 18), package type (on page 29), and the product type
(on page 31) entities. The precedence of the icon displayed in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101), Bill of
Lading Inspector (on page 74), and the Unit Inspector is as follows:
• Package Type
• Product Type
• Commodity
• Standard Navis Cubes icon
To add or edit a package type:
1. In the Id field, enter an ID that uniquely identifies the package type.
2. Enter any optional information or associate an icon with the package type.
3. Click Save.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Package Type form:
Field Label
Description
UCC/EAN-128 Code
Enter the UCC/EAN-128 code for the package
type.
Description
Enter a short description for the package type.
If you use EDI to send and receive hazard
information, N4 trims the package type
description to seven characters.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
29
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Product Types view
Field Label
Description
Icon
Select a media asset that represents the icon for
the package type in N4.
The lookup field displays the media assets that
exist at the current scope level. To add a new icon
as a media asset, see Media Assets view.
2.1.6 Product Types view
Configuration
Cargo
Product Types
Product Types view
The Product Types view displays the product types that exist at the current scope level. Use product types to define
the type of product for an item on a bill of lading. A product type is the Universal Product Code (UPC) for an item, such
as USGE357 for General Electric product number 357 sold in the US. For more information on bill of lading items, see
Bill of Lading Item form (on page 66). N4 uses the information specified for the product type to automatically fill in
the fields in the Bill of Lading Item form.
N4 allows you to associate an icon with the commodity (on page 18), package type (on page 29), and the product type
(on page 31) entities. The precedence of the icon displayed in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101), Bill of
Lading Inspector (on page 74), and the Unit Inspector is as follows:
• Package Type
• Product Type
• Commodity
• Standard Navis Cubes icon
You can add new product types, and edit or delete existing product types from this view.
You cannot delete a product type if it is associated with a bill of lading item.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
30
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Product Types view
Product Types Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Changed
Record Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record Changed User
X
X
Code
Universal Code
X
X
Created
Record Create Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create User
X
X
Desc
Description
X
X
Id
Id
X
X
Unit By QTY
Unit By QTY
X
X
2.1.6.1 Product Type form
Configuration
Cargo
Product Types
Product Types view
Product Type form
The Product Type form enables you to add a new product type and edit an existing product type. Use product types to
define the type of product for an item on a bill of lading. A product type is the Universal Product Code (UPC) for an
item, such as USGE357 for General Electric product number 357 sold in the US.
N4 allows you to associate an icon with the commodity (on page 18), package type (on page 29), and the product type
(on page 31) entities. The precedence of the icon displayed in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101), Bill of Lading
Inspector (on page 74), and the Unit Inspector is as follows:
• Package Type
• Product Type
• Commodity
• Standard Navis Cubes icon
To add or edit a product type:
1. In the Id field, enter an ID the uniquely identifies the product type.
2. Enter any optional information or associate an icon with the product type.
3. Click Save.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Product Type form:
Field Label
Description
Universal Code
Enter the UPC code for the product type.
Description
Enter a short description for the product type.
Unit By QTY
Select the check box if the product type represents
identified cargo and is unitized by quantity only. For
more information, see Cargo Lots view (on page
96).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
31
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazardous Goods view
Field Label
Description
Icon
Select a media asset that represents the icon for
the product type in N4.
The lookup field displays the media assets that
exist at the current scope level. To add a new icon
as a media asset, see Media Assets view.
2.1.7 Hazardous Goods view
Configuration
Cargo
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
The Hazardous Goods view displays the hazardous goods that exist at the current scope level. The hazardous goods
listed in this view form the reference data that is displayed in various forms that allow you to associate hazards with
other entities such as bookings and units.
If you have the hazardous goods data as an XML file based on the snx.xsd, you can use Administration
Import SNX File option to import the initial data for the Hazardous Goods view.
DBA
You can also add, edit, and delete hazardous goods records from this view.
For more information about the privileges for the Hazardous Goods view, see Cargo Privileges (on page 51).
In addition, you can use the Actions Export SNX File option to export the selected hazardous goods records as an
XML file using the snx.xsd format. For example, if you make a lot of edits to the data at one facility and you want to
replicate the same edits across all facilities, you can use the Export SNX File option to export the data from the first
facility and use SNX to import it at the other facilities.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Hazardous Goods Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
IMDG Class
IMDG Class
X
X
Is Placard Optional
Is Placard Optional
X
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
32
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Short Label
Cargo Setup
Hazardous Goods view
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Hazard Number Type
Hazard Number Type
X
X
Placard
Placard
X
X
Placard Explanation
Placard Explanation
X
X
Placard Min. Weight (kg)
Placard Min. Weight (kg)
X
X
Proper Name
Proper Name
X
X
UN/NA Number
UN/NA
X
X
2.1.7.1 Hazardous Goods form
Configuration
Cargo
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
The Hazardous Goods form enables you to add hazardous goods records for your site. You can also use this form to
edit an existing hazardous goods record.
To add or edit a hazardous goods record:
1. In the UN/NA Number field, enter the United Nations or North American Department of Transportation identification
number for the hazardous good.
You can enter a maximum of four characters in this field.
N4 does not perform any validations for the data entered in this form. You must ensure that the correct
information is specified for each hazardous goods record.
2. Enter other optional information for the hazardous goods record, such as the IMDG Class, the Proper Name, and
the Placards.
3. Click Save.
N4 uses the data specified in this form to automatically fill-in the appropriate fields in when you are adding
hazards for a container or a booking.
However, if you use this form to edit the hazardous goods information after you have associated the
hazardous goods with a unit or a booking, N4 does not automatically update the unit record. If you want to
update the unit record, you must do so manually using the Hazards form.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Hazardous Goods form:
Field Label
Description
IMDG Class
Select the IMDG class for the hazardous goods
record.
Proper Name
Enter the legal name for the hazardous goods.
Hazard Number Type
Select either United Nations (UN) or North
American (NA) to specify the organization that
issued the identification number for the
hazardous goods.
Is Placard Optional
Select the check box if the placard associated
with the hazardous goods is optional.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
33
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazardous Goods view
Field Label
Placard
Description
Select the placard associated with the hazardous
goods.
N4 displays the placard in the Booking
Inspector and the Unit Inspector if you
associate the hazardous good with the
booking or the unit.
When you associate the hazardous goods record
with an entity, such as a unit or a booking, N4
associates all the unique placards specified for
the hazardous goods and any subsidiary risks
with the entity. For example, if you have the
same placard associated with the hazardous
goods record and a subsidiary risk record, N4
displays the placard only once for the entity with
which you associate the hazardous goods.
You can associate only one placard with
each hazardous goods record. To
specify additional placards, use the
Subsidiary Risks tab (on page 35).
2.1.7.2 Hazardous Goods Inspector
Configuration
Cargo
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
Hazardous Goods Inspector
The Hazardous Goods Inspector displays the details of the selected hazardous goods record. You can keep the
Hazardous Goods Inspector open at all times as you work in other views and forms, and you can move and resize it
as needed.
When you update the selected hazardous goods record, N4 automatically refreshes the information displayed in the
Hazardous Goods Inspector.
The basic information for a hazardous goods record is displayed in the following areas:
• Inspect Hazardous Goods: The left area displays the UN/NA Number for the hazardous goods record.
• Details: The middle area displays the hazardous goods details, such as the IMDG class, the proper name for the
hazardous goods, the organization that issued the identification number, and whether the placards associated with
the record are optional.
• Placard Details: The right area displays the details of the hazard placards associated with the record.
N4 automatically fills-in these details from the Hazard Placards view (on page 24).
The Details pane (on page 35) displays additional information for the selected hazardous goods record below the
button.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
34
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Hazardous Goods view
To display the Details pane:
1. Click
.
2. From the list on the left, select the type of information to display.
To perform actions:
1. Click Actions to display the menu.
2. Select the required menu option.
Hazardous Goods Inspector Columns
The following tables list the columns on the various tabs in the Hazardous Goods Inspector (on page 34).
Subsidiary Risks Tab
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Group?
IMDG Class
IMDG Class
X
X
4-Contents
Is Placard
Optional
Is Placard
Optional
X
X
4-Contents
Placard
Placard
X
X
4-Contents
Placard
Explanation
Placard
Explanation
X
X
4-Contents
Placard Min.
Weight (kg)
Placard Min.
Weight (kg)
X
X
4-Contents
Details pane in the Hazardous Goods Inspector
Configuration
Cargo
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
Hazardous Goods Inspector
The Details pane in the Hazardous Goods Inspector displays the additional risks associated with the hazardous
goods in the Subsidiary Risks (on page 35) tab.
Subsidiary Risks tab
Configuration
Cargo
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
Hazardous Goods Inspector
Subsidiary Risks tab
The Subsidiary Risks tab displays the additional risks associated with the selected hazardous goods record. You can
add, edit, and delete subsidiary risks from this tab.
For more information about the privileges for the Subsidiary Risks tab, see Cargo Privileges (on page 51).
Subsidiary Risk form
Configuration Cargo
Subsidiary Risk form
Hazardous Goods
Hazardous Goods view
Hazardous Goods Inspector
Subsidiary Risks tab
The Subsidiary Risk form enables you to add or edit a subsidiary risk associated with the selected hazardous goods
record.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
35
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Setup
Cargo Damage Types view
To add or edit a subsidiary risk:
1. From the IMDG Class drop-down list, select the IMDG class for the additional risk associated with the selected
hazardous goods.
2. Optionally, from the Placard drop-down list, select the placard associated with the subsidiary risk.
You can associate only one placard with each subsidiary risk record. To specify additional placards, add
multiple subsidiary risks with the same IMDG Class.
3. Select the Is Placard Optional check box, if the placard associated with the subsidiary risk is optional.
4. Click Save.
When you associate the hazardous goods record with an entity, such as a unit or a booking, N4 associates all the
unique placards specified for the hazardous goods and any subsidiary risks with the entity. For example, if you have
the same placard associated with the hazardous goods record and a subsidiary risk record, N4 displays the placard
only once for the entity with which you associate the hazardous goods.
2.1.8 Cargo Damage Types view
Configuration
Cargo
Cargo Damage Types
Cargo Damage Types view
The Cargo Damage Types view displays the damage types that you can record against cargo lots. The damage types
displayed in the Damage Types view are used to record damages against equipment, such as containers and chassis.
Since cargo lots are not associated with any equipment, you must use the damage types displayed in the Cargo
Damage Types view to record damages against cargo lots.
You can add new cargo damage types or edit and delete existing cargo damage types from this view.
You must have the Cargo Damage Type privileges to view and update records in this list view. For more
information on available privileges, see General Cargo Privileges (on page 47).
In addition, you can use the Actions menu to:
• Recover Obsolete: Recover deleted cargo damage types.
When you use the Delete ( ) button to delete a damage type, N4 does not delete the damage type permanently. It
only marks the damage type as obsolete. You can use the Display Show All option to view all the obsolete
records in the list view. The Lifecycle column indicates whether a damage type is active or obsolete.
When you record a damage against a cargo lot, N4 displays only the active damage types in the lookup field.
• Purge: Permanently delete cargo damage types.
You can purge a cargo damage type only if it is not recorded against a cargo lot entity.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
36
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
▪ Click
Cargo Setup
Cargo Damage Types view
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
Cargo Damage Types Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Changed
Record Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record Changed User
X
X
Created
Record Create Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create User
X
X
Description
Description
X
X
ID
ID
X
X
Lifecycle
Lifecycle
X
X
2.1.8.1 Cargo Damage Type form
Configuration
Cargo
Cargo Damage Types
Cargo Damage Types view
Cargo Damage Type form
The Cargo Damage Type form enables you to add or edit a cargo damage type (on page 36). You can use a cargo
damage type to record a damage against a cargo lot. To add a damage type for an equipment, such as a container or a
chassis, use the Equipment Damage Type form.
To add a cargo damage type:
1. In the ID field, enter a unique identifier for the cargo damage type.
2. In the Description field, enter a short description of the damage type.
3. Click Save.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
37
2.2 Cargo Configuration
This section lists the N4 settings that you can use to configure various cargo operations.
Bill of Lading settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cargo Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
38
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Bill of Lading settings
2.2.1 Bill of Lading settings
You can use the following settings to configure the level of Bill of Lading functionality used for your site.
INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING)
Set it to false if you do not use the full Bill of Lading functionality and you want N4 to treat the BL number as only a text
field.
The default value for INVBL001 is true.
You can use the Shipment Details form to record the BL number for a unit. In addition, N4 displays the BL number in
the Units view and in the Status area in the Unit Inspector.
For validating the POD of the unit against the POD of the BL, see the CGOCargoValidation002
(MATCH_BL_UNIT_POD) (on page 40) setting.
INVBL002 (BILLS_OF_LADING_FOR_ALL_IMPORT_EMPTIES)
Set it to true if you use bills of lading for all empty import containers and if you do not want N4 to send the BL Number
to XPS as the release number.
The default value for INVBL002 is false.
2.2.2 Cargo Settings
You can use the following settings to specify the level of validation that N4 must implement for the cargo and bills of
lading associated with a container.
CGOCargoRelease001 (RELEASE_BY_QTY_FLAGTYPE)
Specify the default terminal hold that you wish to apply to a Bill of Lading. Whenever a BL is created, N4 places this
hold that either releases or applies a hold by quantity. If the Released Quantity and the Manifested Quantity are
equal, the hold defined is released for a BL.
Ensure you use the same ID when defining the default hold using the Hold/Permission Type form.
CGOCargoValidation001 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_LINE)
This setting determines whether N4 must validate the line operator for the unit against the line operator for the bill of
lading during data entry in a form, SNX import, or processing an EDI message. The default value for
CGOCargoValidation001 is true and N4 validates the unit line operator against the BL line operator for all these
processes.
Set it to false, if you do not want N4 to validate the line operator for the unit against the line operator for the bill of
lading.If you override this setting for your site, you must do so at the Complex scope level for the EDI messages to
use the correct value of the setting.
If you see a line operator mismatch error message, it could be a result of this being set to true.
line operator mismatch
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
39
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Settings
CGOCargoValidation002 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POD)
This setting determines whether N4 must validate the Port of Discharge (POD) for the unit against the POD for the bill
of lading during data entry in a form, SNX import, or processing an EDI message. The default value for
CGOCargoValidation002 is true and N4 validates the unit POD against the BL POD for all these processes.
Set it to false, if you do not want N4 to validate the POD for the unit against the POD for the bill of lading.If you
override this setting for your site, you must do so at the Complex scope level for the EDI messages to use the correct
value of the setting.
To enable/disable the Bill of Lading functionality, see INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING) (on page 39)
setting.
CGOCargoValidation003 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POL)
This setting determines whether N4 must validate the Port of Load (POL) for the unit against the POL for the bill of
lading during data entry in a form, SNX import, or processing an EDI message. The default value for
CGOCargoValidation002 is true and N4 validates the unit POL against the POL for the BL for all these processes.
Set it to false, if you do not want N4 to validate the POL for the unit against the POL for the bill of lading.If you override
this setting for your site, you must do so at the Complex scope level for the EDI messages to use the correct value of
the setting.
CGOCargoValidation004 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_CARRIER_VISIT)
This setting determines whether N4 must validate the carrier visit for the unit against the carrier visit for the bill of lading
during data entry in a form, SNX import, or processing an EDI message. The default value for
CGOCargoValidation004 is true and N4 validates the unit carrier visit against the BL carrier visit for all these
processes.
Set it to false, if you do not want N4 to validate the carrier visit for the unit against the carrier visit for the bill of lading.If
you override this setting for your site, you must do so at the Complex scope level for the EDI messages to use the
correct value of the setting.
CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN)
You can use this setting to determine whether to merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one
BL to another BL with identical commodities. For information on how to re-consign one BL to another, see Merge or
move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical commodities (on page
188).
By default, N4 merges the BL items if you re-consign one BL to another BL with matching commodity.
If you override this setting by selecting MOVE_ITEMS_IDENTIFIED_CARGO, N4 moves the BL items from one BL to
the other BL with matching commodity.
This setting is applicable only for identified cargo lots. You can use the Identified Lots tab (on page 71) in the
Bill of Lading Item form to add or edit identified cargo lots.
INVMOBILE_RDT005 (MOBILE_CARGO_INVENTORY_POPULATE_QTY)
N4 Mobile populates the Quantity field withthe cargo lot quantity in all N4 Mobile Cargo Inventory programs. You can
use this setting to either display or hide the cargo lot quantity in the Quantity field.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
40
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Settings
True: N4 Mobile Cargo Inventory programs populate the Quantity field with the cargo lot quantity.
False: N4 Mobile Cargo Inventory programs do not populate the cargo lot quantity in the Quantity field and allows the
user to enter the quantity.
The default value of the setting is True.
ROADGATE034 (CARGO_BL_LOV_FILTER)
This setting gives you the option to filter and view Cargo Bill Of Lading and Cargo BL Item data based on your gate
transaction type (either Receive Break-Bulk or Deliver Break-Bulk). For example, if you are performing a Receive
Break-Bulk transaction, the Cargo Bill Of Lading and Cargo BL Item LOV fields filter and display data only
associated with the Receive Break-Bulk transaction type.
If the ROADGATE034 gate setting is set to:
True: The Cargo Bill Of Lading and Cargo BL Item LOV fields in the Gate form filter and display data based on the
transaction type (Receive Break-Bulk or Deliver Break-Bulk).
Depending on the size of your database, setting ROADGATE034 to True could cause performance issues that
may slow down your gate process.
False: The Cargo Bill Of Lading and Cargo BL Item LOV fields in the Gate form display all values irrespective of the
transaction type.
The default value for this setting is False.
xpscacheCARGO001 (CARGO_XPS)
This setting determines if N4 should send break bulk cargo units to XPS. Set it to:
• true to share with XPS the break bulk cargo units listed on the N4 Unit Inspector
Cargo Lots tab.
• false (default) if you don't want N4 to share with XPS the break bulk cargo units listed on the N4 Unit Inspector
Cargo Lots tab.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
41
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
2.2.3 Cargo Privileges
This section lists the privileges available in N4 to secure the various cargo related components in N4 and N4 Mobile.
2.2.3.1 N4 Cargo Privileges
The following topics list the various privileges associated with the Cargo module in N4.
Bills of Lading Privileges
The following table displays the privileges associated with the bills of lading.
ID
Name
Description
License
Option Name
INSPECT_ARCHIVED_BILLS Archived Bills of Lading _OF_LADING
Inspect
Inspect archived bills of lading CORE_FEAT
using the Archived Bills of
lading Inspector
System Foundation II
BILL_OF_LADING_ADD_SE
RVICE_ORDER
Create Service Order from bill SERVICE_ORDER
of lading
Service Order Management
Bill of Lading - Add Service
Order
BILL_OF_LADING_APPLY_R Bills of Lading Actions - Apply/ Allows the user to apply/
BILL_OF_LADING
ELEASE_HOLDS_PERMISSI Release the Holds/
release the Holds/Permissions
ONS
Permissions
for a bill of lading using the
Bills of Lading view (on
page 59) Actions menu.
Bills Of Lading
If you do not want to
allow a user to edit a
bill of lading but still
be able to release a
hold/permission
associated with a bill
of lading, you can
include the Bills of
Lading Actions Apply/Release the
Holds/Permissions
privilege for the user
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
42
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License
Option Name
and exclude the Bills
of Lading - Edit
privilege.
INSPECT_BOL_DENY_COM
MODITY_NOTE
Bill Of Lading Inspector Deny Access to Commodity
Note
Deny access to Commodity
CORE_FEAT
Note column in Bill of Lading
Inspector
System Foundation II
BILL_OF_LADING_ADD
Bills of Lading - Add
Add bills of lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_EQUIPME Bills of Lading - Add Units/
NT_ADD
Items
Add units/items to bills of
lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_COPY
Bills of Lading - Copy
Copies bills of lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_DELETE
Bills of Lading - Delete
Delete bills of lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_ITEM_DE Bills of Lading - Delete Items
LETE
Delete bills of lading items
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_EQUIPME Bills of Lading - Delete Units/
NT_DELETE
Items
Delete units/items from bills of BILL_OF_LADING
lading
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_EDIT
Bills of Lading - Edit
Edit bills of lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
BILL_OF_LADING_VIEW
Bills of Lading - View
View bills of lading
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
field.DENY.blBondTruckingCo Deny access to Bill of Lading
mpany
field Bond Trucking Company
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Bond Trucking
Company in list views and
forms.
field.DENY.blitemCommodityN Deny access to Bill of Lading
ote
field Commodity Note
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Commodity Note in list
views and forms.
field.DENY.blExam
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Exam Status
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Exam Status in list views
and forms.
field.DENY.blInbond
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Inbond Status
Deny access to Bill of Lading
field Inbond Status in list
views and forms.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
43
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
field.DENY.blrelPostDate
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License
Deny access to Bill of Lading
Release field Post Date
Deny access to Bill of Lading
Release field Post Date in list
views and forms.
Option Name
GATE_TRANSACTION_VIEW Gate Transactions - View Bills View bills of lading in the
_BILLS_OF_LADING
Of Lading
Transaction Entry panel on
the gate screens.
GATE
Gate
INSPECT_UNIT_BILL_OF_L
ADING
Unit Inspector - Bills of Lading Access the Bills of Lading
panel in the Unit Inspector
BILL_OF_LADING
Bills Of Lading
Name
Option Name
CFS Privileges
ID
Description
License Required
CARGO_STRIP
Cargo Lot - Strip
Strip Cargo Lot using CFS
the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
Container Freight
Station (CFS)
CARGO_STUFF
Cargo Lot - Stuff
Stuff Cargo Lot using CFS
the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
Container Freight
Station (CFS)
Delivery Order Privileges
ID
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
CARGO_DELIVERY_ORDER Cargo Lot - Create Delivery
Order
Create Delivery Order using
the Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_ADD
Delivery Order - Add
Add Delivery Order
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_DELET
E
Delivery Order - Delete
Delete Delivery Order
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_EDIT
Delivery Order - Edit
Edit Delivery Order
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
Inspect Delivery Order details
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
INSPECT_DELIVERY_ORDE Delivery Order - Inspect
R
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
44
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
DELIVERY_ORDER_VIEW
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Delivery Order - View
Description
License Required
Option Name
View Delivery Order
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_CANCE Delivery Order Actions L
Cancel Service Order
Cancel Delivery Order
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_RECOR Delivery Order Actions D_SERVICE_EVENT
Record Service Event
Record service events for
delivery orders
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_ITEM_A Delivery Order Item - Add
DD
Add Delivery Order Item
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_ITEM_D Delivery Order Item - Delete
ELETE
Delete Delivery Order Item
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_ITEM_E Delivery Order Item - Edit
DIT
Edit Delivery Order Item
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
DELIVERY_ORDER_ITEM_V Delivery Order Item - View
IEW
View Delivery Order Item
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
Gate Cargo Privileges
ID/Name/Description
License Required
Option Name
GATE_CARGO_LOTS_TABLE_A GATE
CTIONS
Gate Screen - Cargo Lots table
actions
Allow Table Actions
Gate
TASK_RejectCargoRequestedNot GATE
AtFacility_OVERRIDE
Override task
RejectCargoRequestedNotAtFacil
ity
Override error for business task
RejectCargoRequestedNotAt
Facility
Gate
TASK_RejectCargoRequestedNot GATE
Found_OVERRIDE
Gate
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
45
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID/Name/Description
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
License Required
Option Name
Override task
RejectCargoRequestedNotFound
Override error for business task
RejectCargoRequestedNotFo
und
TASK_RejectCargoRequestedNot GATE
InYard_OVERRIDE
Override task
RejectCargoRequestedNotInYard
Override error for business task
RejectCargoRequestedNotIn
Yard
Gate
TASK_RejectCargoUnloadNotCo GATE
mplete_OVERRIDE
Override task
RejectCargoUnloadNotComplete
Override error for business task
RejectCargoUnloadNotCompl
ete
Gate
TASK_RejectCommodityDryCarg GATE
oInReefer_OVERRIDE
Override task
RejectCommodityDryCargoInReef
er
Override error for business task
RejectCargoUnloadNotCompl
ete
Gate
TASK_RejectTruckingCoMatches GATE
ExamOrSeizedCargoCarrier_OV
ERRIDE
Override task
RejectTruckingCoMatchesExamO
rSeizedCargoCarrier
Override error for business task
Gate
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
46
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
ID/Name/Description
License Required
Option Name
RejectTruckingCoMatchesEx
amOrSeizedCargoCarrier
TASK_RejectTruckingCompanyN GATE
otSeizedCargoCarrier_OVERRID
E
Override task
RejectTruckingCompanyNotSeize
dCargoCarrier
Override error for business task
RejectTruckingCompanyNotS
eizedCargoCarrier
Gate
General Cargo Privileges
ID
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
CARGO_ACTION_KEYS Cargo - Keyboard
TROKE
Shortcut
Apply Actions via
Keyboard Shortcuts
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
CARGO_ADD_LOT
Cargo Lot - Add
Add Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_ADJUST_QUA
NTITY
Cargo Lot - Adjust
Quantity
Adjust Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
Quantity using the Cargo
Lot -> Actions menu
General Cargo
CARGO_DAMAGE_TYP Cargo Damage Type E_ADD
Add
Add Cargo Damage
Type
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_DAMAGE_TYP Cargo Damage Type E_DELETE
Delete
Delete Cargo Damage
Type
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_DAMAGE_TYP Cargo Damage Type E_EDIT
Edit
Edit Cargo Damage Type GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_DAMAGE_TYP Cargo Damage Type E_VIEW
View
View Cargo Damage
Type
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_DELETE_LOT
Cargo Lot - Delete
Delete Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_EDIT_LOT
Cargo Lot - Edit
Edit Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_IDENTIFY
Cargo Lot - Identify
Identify Cargo Lot using
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
47
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
the Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
CARGO_INSPECT
Cargo Lot - Inspect
Inspect Cargo Lot details GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_LOAD_RAIL
Cargo Lot - Load Rail
Load Cargo Lot to Rail
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_LOAD_TRUCK Cargo Lot - Load Truck
Load Cargo Lot to Truck
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_LOAD_VESSE
L
Cargo Lot - Load Vessel
Load Cargo Lot to Vessel GENERAL_CARGO
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
General Cargo
CARGO_LOT_CREATE
_SERVICE_ORDER
Cargo Lot - Create
Service Order
Create Service Order
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
Service Order
Management
CARGO_LOT_DENY_U
NFILTERED_VIEW
Cargo Lot - Deny
Unfiltered View
Disallow unfiltered view
of the Cargo Lots view
(on page 96) and the
Pre-Advised Cargo
view (on page 146).
SERVICE_ORDER
This privilege is
applicable only if
the user has at
least the Cargo
Lot - View
privilege to
access the
Cargo Lots view
and the PreAdvised Cargo
view.
This privilege prevents
the user from accessing
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
48
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
the following options in
the Saved Filter menu:
• Save table view as
filter
• Delete current filter
• -CARGO_LOT_RECORD Cargo Lot - Record
_SERVICE_EVENT
Service Event
Record Service events
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions Menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_MANIFEST_CA Cargo Lot - Cancel
NCEL
Manifest
Cancel Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
Manifest using the Cargo
Lot -> Actions menu
General Cargo
CARGO_MANIFEST_C
ONTAINER
Manifest Cargo arriving
in a Container using the
Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_MANIFEST_RA Cargo Lot - Manifest Rail Manifest Cargo arriving
IL
by Rail using the Cargo
Lot -> Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_MANIFEST_VE Cargo Lot - Manifest
SSEL
Vessel
Manifest Cargo arriving
by Vessel using the
Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_MANUFACTUR Cargo Lot - Manufacture
E
Manufacture Cargo Lot
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_MOVE
Cargo Lot - Move
Move Cargo Lot using
the Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_RECONSIGN
Cargo Lot - Reconsign
BL
Reconsign BL Cargo Lot GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_SPLIT
Cargo Lot - Split BL
Split BL Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_TRANSLOAD
Cargo Lot - TransLoad
TransLoad Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Cargo Lot - Manifest
Container
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
49
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
using the Cargo Lot ->
Actions menu
CARGO_UNLOAD_RAIL Cargo Lot - Unload Rail
Unload Cargo Lot from
Rail using the Cargo Lot
-> Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_UNLOAD_TRU Cargo Lot - Unload Truck Unload Cargo Lot from
CK
Truck using the Cargo
Lot -> Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_UNLOAD_VES Cargo Lot - Unload
SEL
Vessel
Unload Cargo Lot from
Vessel using the Cargo
Lot -> Actions menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_UNWRAP
UnWrap Cargo Lot using GENERAL_CARGO
the Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
General Cargo
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Cargo Lot - Update /
AGE
Record Damage
Update/Record Damage
for Cargo Lot using the
Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_VIEW_LOT
Cargo Lot - View
View Cargo Lot
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
CARGO_WRAP
Cargo Lot - wrap
Wrap Cargo Lot using
the Cargo Lot -> Actions
menu
GENERAL_CARGO
General Cargo
Cargo Lot - Unwrap
Other Cargo Privileges
ID
Name
INSPECT_RVD_CARGO_LO
TS
Train Inspector - Cargo Lots
Access Cargo Lot panel in the RAIL, CARGO
Train Inspector
INSPECT_TVD_CARGO_LO
TS
Truck Visit Inspector - Cargo
Lots
Access Cargo Lot panel in the ROAD, CARGO
Truck Visit Inspector
INSPECT_UVD_CARGO_LO
TS
Unit Inspector - Cargo Lots
Access Cargo Lot panel in the CARGO
Unit Inspector
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Description
License Required
Option Name
Rail License
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
50
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
ID
Name
INSPECT_VVD_CARGO_LO
TS
Vessel Inspector - Cargo Lots
Description
License Required
Access Cargo Lot panel in the VESSEL, CARGO
Vessel Inspector
Option Name
Vessel
Reference Cargo Privileges
The following privileges control access to the Configuration
ID
Name
Cargo menu in N4.
Description
License Required
Option Name
CARGO_ADD
Cargo - Add
Add Commodities, Special
Stows, Hazard Placards,
Package Types, and Product
Types using the
Configuration Cargo
menu
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
CARGO_DELETE
Cargo - Delete
Delete Commodities, Special
Stows, Hazard Placards,
Package Types, and Product
Types using the
Configuration Cargo
menu
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
CARGO_EDIT
Cargo - Edit
Edit Commodities, Special
Stows, Hazard Placards,
Package Types, and Product
Types using the
Configuration Cargo
menu
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
CARGO_VIEW
Cargo - View
View Commodities, Special
Stows, Hazard Placards,
Package Types, and Product
Types using the
Configuration Cargo
menu
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
HAZARDOUS_GOODS_ADD Hazardous Goods - Add
Add Hazardous Goods
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
HAZARDOUS_GOODS_DEL
ETE
Delete Hazardous Goods.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Hazardous Goods - Delete
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
51
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
HAZARDOUS_GOODS_UPD Hazardous Goods - Edit
ATE
Edit Hazardous Goods.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
HAZARDOUS_GOODS_VIE
W
View Hazardous Goods.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
Inspect a hazardous goods
record using the Hazardous
Goods Inspector.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
Hazardous Goods - View
INSPECT_HAZARDOUS_GO Hazardous Goods - Inspector
ODS
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
52
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
SUBSIDIARY_RISK_ADD
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Subsidiary Risks - Add
Description
Add Subsidiary Risks.
License Required
Option Name
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
In addition to the
Subsidiary Risks Add privilege, you
must have the
Hazardous Goods Inspector privilege to
be able to add
Subsidiary Risks for a
hazardous goods
record.
If you have the Subsidiary
Risks - Add privilege but not
the Hazardous Goods Inspector privilege, you
cannot add the subsidiary
risks.
The above
statements are also
true for the other
subsidiary risks
privileges
(Subsidiary Risks Delete, Subsidiary
Risks - Edit, and
Subsidiary Risks View).
SUBSIDIARY_RISK_DELETE Subsidiary Risks - Delete
Delete Subsidiary Risks.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
SUBSIDIARY_RISK_EDIT
Subsidiary Risks - Edit
Edit Subsidiary Risks.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
SUBSIDIARY_RISK_VIEW
Subsidiary Risks - View
View Subsidiary Risks.
CORE_FEAT
System Foundation II
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
53
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
2.2.3.2 N4 Mobile Privileges
The following privilege applies to all N4 Mobile applications.
ID
Name
MOBILE_APPS_MANAGEME Mobile Applications
NT
Management
Description
License Required
Allows access to the Reset
CORE_FEAT
button that clears the cache of
internal damage code
mappings
Option Name
System Foundation II
The following tables display the privileges applicable to specific applications.
Cargo Inventory Privileges
The following privileges are included in the CARGO_MOBILE feature and are related to Navis N4 Mobile Cargo Inventory.
ID
Name
CARGO_INVENTORY_
MOBILE
Mobile Cargo Inventory
Description
Mobile Cargo - Cargo
Inventory
License Required
Option Name
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_INSPECT_MO Mobile Cargo Inventory - Inspect Cargo Lot details CARGO_MOBILE
BILE
Inspect
using Cargo Inventory
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_LOAD_RAIL_
MOBILE
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_LOAD_TRUCK Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Cargo Lot to Truck CARGO_MOBILE
_MOBILE
Load Truck
using Cargo Inventory
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_LOAD_VESSE Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Cargo Lot to
L_MOBILE
Load Vessel
Vessel using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_MOVE_MOBIL Mobile Cargo Inventory - Move Cargo Lot using
E
Move Cargo
Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_IDENTIFY_MO Mobile Cargo Inventory - Identify Cargo Lot using
BILE
Identify
Cargo Inventory
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Cargo Lot to Rail
Load Rail
using Cargo Inventory
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
54
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
Description
License Required
Option Name
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_INSPECT_MOBIL Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when
E
Inspect
inspecting using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_LOAD_RAIL_MOB Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when loading
ILE
Load Rail
to Rail using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_LOAD_TRUCK_M Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when loading
OBILE
Load Truck
to Truck using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_LOAD_VESSEL_ Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when loading
MOBILE
Load Vessel
on Vessel using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_STRIP_MOBILE
Record Damage on Strip Cargo Lot when
stripping using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_STUFF_MOBILE Record Damage on Stuff Cargo Lot when stuffing
using Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_UNLOAD_RAIL_M Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when
OBILE
Unload Rail
unloading to Rail using
Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
AGE_UNLOAD_TRUCK Record Damage on
Cargo Lot when
_MOBILE
Unload Truck
unloading from Truck
using Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UPDATE_DAM Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
Cargo Lot when
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
55
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
ID
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Name
AGE_UNLOAD_VESSE Record Damage on
L_MOBILE
Unload Vessel
CARGO_RECORD_DA
MAGE
Description
License Required
Option Name
unloading from Vessel
using Cargo Inventory
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damages for
Record Damages
Cargo Lot when using
Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_STRIP_MOBIL Mobile Cargo Inventory - Strip Cargo Lot using
E
Strip
Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_STUFF_MOBI
LE
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Stuff Cargo Lot using
Stuff
Cargo Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UNLOAD_RAI
L_MOBILE
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Unload Cargo Lot from
Unload Rail
Rail using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UNLOAD_TRU Mobile Cargo Inventory - Unload Cargo Lot from
CK_MOBILE
Unload Truck
Truck using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
CARGO_UNLOAD_VES Mobile Cargo Inventory - Unload Cargo Lot from
SEL_MOBILE
Unload Vessel
Vessel using Cargo
Inventory
CARGO_MOBILE
RDT Cargo
Management
The Cargo Inventory tasks and the associated privileges are listed in the below table:
Task
Privilege(s)
Record Cargo Inventory
Mobile Cargo Inventory
Allows to identify the cargo lots based on
position, bill of lading, marks, or cargo lot ID .
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Identify
Allows to search for cargo lots based on position, Mobile Cargo Inventory - Inspect
bill of lading, cargo lot ID, or marks and inspect
them.
Allows to search for cargo lots based on position, Mobile Cargo Inventory - Move Cargo
bill of lading, cargo lot ID, or marks and move
them.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
56
Part 2: Cargo Setup and Configuration
Task
Allows to search for cargo lots associated with a
bill of lading, unit ID or cargo lot and strip from a
container/stuff into a container.
Cargo Configuration
Cargo Privileges
Privilege(s)
Strip: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Strip
Stuff: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Stuff
Allows to search for cargo lots and load/unload to Rail: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Rail/Mobile
or from rail, truck or vessel using Cargo
Cargo Inventory - Unload Rail
Inventory.
Truck: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Truck/
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Unload Truck
Vessel: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Load Vessel/
Mobile Cargo Inventory - Unload Vessel
Allows to record damages for cargo lots when
loading/unloading to or from rail, truck or vessel
using Cargo Inventory.
Rail: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damage
on Load Rail/Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damage on Unload Rail
Truck: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record Damage
on Load Truck/Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damage on Unload Truck
Vessel: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damage on Load Vessel/Mobile Cargo Inventory
- Record Damage on Unload Vessel
Allows to record damages for cargo lots when
using/inspecting Cargo Inventory.
Damages: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damages
Inspecting Damages: Mobile Cargo Inventory Record Damage on Inspect
Record damages due to cargo lot stripping/
stuffing using Cargo Inventory.
Stripping: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damage on Strip
Stuffing: Mobile Cargo Inventory - Record
Damage on Stuff
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
57
Part 3
Cargo Management
In this Section:
Bills of Lading view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Delivery Orders view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cargo Lots view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pre-Advised Cargo view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
58
3.1 Bills of Lading view
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Prerequisites
• To access the Bills of Lading view, you need to assign the Bills of Lading - View privilege to your user role.
A bill of lading is a document or a contract between a line operator and a shipper. See where bills of lading fit in the
Gate Operations process
The bill of lading lists all cargo items received from a shipper that will be delivered to the consignee named in the
contract. It also lists the origin and the destination of the cargo. One bill of lading can list cargo items that are
distributed among several containers. It can also list non-containerized cargo (cargo located on the vessel), such as
automobiles. Conversely, one container can include cargo items from several bills of lading. Each bill of lading relates
to a single vessel visit.
You can use bills of lading to manage the release of import and transship containers arriving on a deep sea vessel.
The Bills of Lading view displays the bills of lading that exist at the current scope level. You can create a filter to limit
the data displayed, such as displaying only the bills of lading for a specific vessel visit.
If you do not use the bill of lading functionality, set the INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING) (on page 39)
configuration setting as false.
When you set INVBL001 as false, N4:
• Does not display the bills of lading for a unit in the Bills of Lading view.
• Displays the bill of lading number in the Units view or in the Status area in the Unit Inspector.
• Allows you to record the bill of lading number for the selected unit using the Shipment Details form.
From this view, you can add new bills of lading, and edit or delete existing bills of lading.
You cannot delete a bill of lading if it is associated with an active gate transaction. In addition, you cannot delete
a Master BL before you delete all the associated Bills of Lading created using the Split BL action.
In addition, you can use the Actions menu to:
• Export SNX File: Export the selected bills of lading as an XML file using the snx.xsd format.
This action is not available from the Actions menu in the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74).
• Inspect Bill of Lading: Displays the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74) for the bill of lading selected in the list
view.
You can also double-click a bill of lading record in the list view to access the inspector.
• Copy Bill of Lading (on page 82): Copies the header information, such as Category, Line Operator, Vessel Visit,
POD, and POL, BL Items, and default cargo lots from the selected bill of lading to create a new bill of lading.
The Inspect Bill of Lading and the Copy Bill of Lading actions are not available from the Actions menu in
the Bill of Lading Inspector.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
59
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Cargo Privileges
In addition, if you select multiple records in the list view, N4 disables the Inspect Bill of Lading and the
Copy Bill of Lading actions.
• Record Service Event: Record service events for the selected bill of lading.
• Update Holds/Permissions: Update holds/permissions for the selected bill of lading.
If you do not want to allow a user to edit a bill of lading but still be able to release a hold/permission
associated with a bill of lading, you can include the Bills of Lading Actions - Apply/Release the Holds/
Permissions privilege for the user and exclude the Bills of Lading - Edit privilege.
• Create Service Order (on page 83): Add a service order for the selected bill of lading.
• Delete Bill Of Lading: Deletes the selected bill of lading
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related
cargo/units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4
displays an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
In This Section
Bills of Lading Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bill of Lading Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Copy Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
60
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading Columns
Bills of Lading Columns
Short Label
Agent
Long Label
Agent
In Filter?
X
Agent Alias
Sorting?
Group?
X
X
BL Category
BL Category
X
X
BL GID
BL Generated
Id
X
X
BL Nbr
BL Number
X
X
Bond Trkc.
Bond Trucking
Company
X
X
Changed
Record
Changed Date
X
X
Changer
Record
Changed User
X
X
Consignee
Consignee
X
X
Consignee
Name
1-Unit
Routing
X
Created
Record Create
Date
X
X
Creator
Record Create
User
X
X
Dest
Destination
X
X
Exam
Exam Status
X
X
Inbond
Inbond Status
X
X
Line Op
Line Operator
X
X
Manifested
Manifested
Quantity
X
X
Mnft Seq Nbr
X
Notify Party1
Add1
Notify Party1
Add1
X
X
Notify Party1
Ctct1
Notify Party1
Contact No1
X
X
Notify Party1
Name
Notify Party1
Name
X
X
Notify Party2
Add2
Notify Party2
Add1
X
X
Notify Party2
Ctct1
Notify Party2
Contact No1
X
X
Notify Party2
Name
Notify Party2
Name
X
X
Origin
Origin
X
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
61
Part 3: Cargo Management
Short Label
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Long Label
In Filter?
Original BL Nbr Original BL Nbr
Sorting?
Group?
X
PIN
PIN
X
X
POD-1
Port of
Discharge
X
X
POD-2
Second Port of
Discharge
X
X
POL
Port of Load
X
X
Released
Released
Quantity
X
Shipper
Shipper
X
Shipper Name
X
X
Ves. Carrier
Name
Ves. Facility
Vessel Visit
Facility
X
X
Routing
Ves. Phase
Vessel Visit
Phase
X
X
Details
Ves. Visit
Vessel Visit
X
X
Routing
3.1.1 Bill of Lading form
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Bill of Lading form
You can use the Bill of Lading form to add or edit a bill of lading (on page 59). You can also use this form to associate
items (on page 66) and units (on page 73) to the bill of lading. See where this task fits in the Gate Operations
process
You must save a new bill of lading before you can add items or units to the bill of lading.
To add or edit a bill of lading:
1. When you open the Bill of Lading form in the edit mode, N4 displays the BL Generated Id field.
This is an auto-generated unique ID for the bill of lading. N4 uses this unique ID to generate the Cargo Lot ID of the
cargo lots associated with the bill of lading. For more information, see Cargo Lots view (on page 96).
2. In the BL Number field, enter a number that identifies the bill of lading.
3. From the Line Operator lookup field, select the line operator for the bill of lading.
The bill of lading line operator must also be the line operator for the carrier visit specified in step 4, unless the
carrier visit is for a common carrier vessel.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
62
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
4. From the BL Category drop-down list, select the category, such as Import, Export or Transship, for the bill of
lading.
You cannot add an Export unit to an Import bill of lading or an Import unit to an Export bill of lading.
5. From the Vessel Visit lookup field, select the vessel visit for the bill of lading.
6. N4 does not display carrier visits that are in the Archived, Closed, or Canceled phase in this list.
If you change the vessel visit associated with a bill of lading, N4 also verifies the Port of Load and Port of
Discharge fields. If the new vessel visit does not have these ports in the itinerary, N4 clears the fields in the
Bill of Lading form. If the new vessel visit has these ports in the itinerary, N4 does not change the values in
the Port of Load and Port of Discharge fields. If these values are no longer appropriate, you must manually
change these values. To view or edit the itinerary of a vessel visit, use the Edit Port Rotation form.
7. Specify any optional information such as the port of load, port of discharge, origin, and destination, for the bill of
lading.
8. Click Save.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Bill of Lading form:
Field Label
Port of Load
Description
Select the port where the units will be loaded on
the vessel.
The ports listed in the lookup field are
based on the itinerary of the selected
vessel visit.
Port of Discharge
Select the port where the units will be discharged
from the vessel.
The ports listed in the lookup field are
based on the itinerary of the selected
vessel visit.
Origin
Enter the point of origin of the cargo in the unit.
Destination
Enter the final destination of the cargo on the bill of
lading.
Shipper
Select the shipper for the bill of lading.
In addition to selecting a value from the lookup
field, you can also enter a new value in the
Shipper field. For more information, see Using
lookup fields.
If you enter a new shipper name, N4
creates a new shipper record and displays
it in the Shippers & Consignees view.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
63
Part 3: Cargo Management
Field Label
Consignee
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Description
Select the consignee for the bill of lading.
In addition to selecting a value from the lookup
field, you can also enter a new value in the
Consignee field. For more information, see Using
lookup fields.
If you enter a new consignee name, N4
create a new consignee record and
displays it in the Shippers & Consignees
view.
Agent
Select the agent for the bill of lading.
In addition to selecting a value from the lookup
field, you can also enter a new value in the Agent
field. For more information, see Using lookup
fields.
If you enter a new agent, N4 create a new
agent record and displays it in the Agents
view.
PIN
Enter the PIN (on page 65), PIN (on page 88)
associated with the bill of lading.
You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric
characters in this field.
You can view the PIN assigned to a BL in the Bills
of Lading view and on the Details area in the Bill
of Lading Inspector (on page 74). In addition,
when you assign a PIN to a bill of lading, N4
records the BL_PROPERTY_UPDATE event
against the bill of lading. You can view this event
on the History, Events tab of the Bill of Lading
Inspector for the bill of lading.
Notes
Enter notes for the bill of lading.
Notify Party1 Name
Enter the name of the first party to which the arrival
notice must be sent.
You can use all the Notify Part fields to
add or edit the information that you
received as part of an EDI message or an
SNX import.
Notify Party2 Name
Enter the name of the second party to which the
arrival notice must be sent.
Notify Party1 Add1
Enter the mailing address of the first party to which
the arrival notice must be sent.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
64
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Field Label
Description
Notify Party2 Add1
Enter the mailing address of the second party to
which the arrival notice must be sent.
Notify Party1 Contact No1
Enter the contact number of the first party to which
the arrival notice must be sent.
Notify Party2 Contact No1
Enter the contact number of the second party to
which the arrival notice must be sent.
Notes
In addition to the fields listed here, you can configure additional fields for the Bill of Lading form using the
Database Backed Variforms view.
When you upload a Manifest EDI message with BL items, N4 processes all items individually, displays the BL
item number for each BL item, and updates the quantity, package weight, and total weight for each of the items.
N4 performs the weight calculations only if the Manifest EDI message has values for any two of the following
fields: Item Quantity, Package Weight (kg), or Item Total Weight (kg). If you specify the item quantity and
package weight, N4 calculates the item's total weight.
PIN
The PIN is a unique identification for a unit, bill of lading, or delivery order that a line operator can use to validate that a
truck driver is picking up the correct container or break-bulk cargo.
For unit
In N4, you can use the Delivery Requirements form to assign or edit the PIN for a unit. These privileges control the
ability to view and edit PIN associated with a unit:
• Pin - Check: You can check whether a PIN is assigned to a unit but you cannot see the actual number.
• Pin - View: You can view the PIN assigned to a unit, but you cannot edit the PIN.
• Pin - Edit: You can view and edit the PIN assigned to a unit.
• Deny access to Unit field PIN Number: You cannot view the PIN Number field or column on forms and list views.
If the user’s role excludes the privileges PIN - Check, PIN - Edit, and PIN – View, then on the Units view, the
PIN Number column displays the data as "****".
A line operator can control:
• Whether to use PINs for all units operated by the line operator
• Whether to assign a PIN for each unit or allow N4 to generate a PIN automatically when the unit is first created, for
example using a stow plan
Use the Line Operator form
Booking Rules tab to specify these restrictions.
A line operator may receive the PIN from an EDI trading partner or it may be generated in N4. If the line operators
assign a PIN to a unit they can specify an alphanumeric value. If N4 generates the PIN, it consists of only digits but the
value is stored as a string value.
PIN is available as part of the Unit reporting entity and can be included in various reports.
You can configure the Pin Number field on a gate form at the outgate stage for a deliver gate transaction to force the
truck driver to enter a PIN. You can include the RejectPinNbrMismatch, RejectPinNbrNotAssigned, and
RejectPinNbrNotEntered business tasks in your gate configuration to control the delivery of a unit using the PIN.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
65
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
For break-bulk cargo
You can use the Bill of Lading form (on page 62) to associate a PIN to a BL. To associate a PIN to a Delivery Order,
you can use either the Delivery Order form (on page 86), Delivery Order form (on page 86) or the Create Delivery
Order form (on page 121).
If you have the privilege that allows you to edit a BL or a delivery order, you can edit the PIN assigned to the BL
or the delivery order.
You can include the Pin Number field as part of your Deliver Break-Bulk gate transaction to force the truck driver to
enter a PIN. You can include the RejectPinNbrMismatch, RejectPinNbrNotAssigned, and
RejectPinNbrNotEntered business tasks in your gate configuration to control the delivery of break-bulk cargo
using the PIN.
3.1.1.1 Items tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Items tab
Items tab
The Items tab displays the BL items associated with the selected bill of lading. You can use a BL item to define the
commodity and the package type of the cargo. In addition, you can specify any reefer requirements for the commodity.
You can add new BL items, and edit or delete existing BL items on this tab.
When you delete a BL item, N4 also deletes any associated records in the Cargo Lots view (on page 96) and the
Units view.
You cannot delete a BL item if it is associated with an active gate transaction.
In addition, you can use the Actions menu to:
• Split BL (on page 72): Split the selected BL Items to a new or existing BL.
• Re-consign BL (on page 72): Re-consign the selected BL Items to a new or existing BL.
• Delete BL Item: Deletes the BL item.
Bill of Lading Item form
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
A bill of lading item defines the commodity and the package type of the cargo. It also specifies additional details related
to the cargo, package contents, and any reefer requirements for the commodity.
Use the Bill of Lading Item form to add or edit an item for the selected bill of lading. When you save a BL item, N4
creates the default cargo lot for the BL item and lists it in the Cargo Lots tab (on page 70). N4 sets a period in the
Default column to indicate a default cargo lot. You cannot edit the Default field manually. After N4 creates the default
cargo lot, you can either manifest or identify this cargo lot. For more information on these actions, see the Cargo Lots
view (on page 96).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
66
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
In addition, you can use the Identified Lots tab (on page 71) to identify cargo lots for a BL item for quantified (nonbulk) cargo.
You cannot add an identified cargo lot for a BL item for measured (bulk) cargo.
To add or edit a bill of lading item:
1. From the Commodity lookup field, select the commodity for the item.
When you select a commodity, if applicable, N4 automatically fills in the Temp Min. (C) and Temp Max. (C)
fields in the Reefer Requirements tab using the data saved in the commodity record.
The lookup field displays only the commodities configured at the current scope level. You can add a new commodity
using the Commodity form (on page 18).
2. In the Item Quantity field, enter the quantity, such as the number of packages, bulk units, or measurements, for the
selected commodity.
3. Specify any optional information for the BL item.
4. Click Save.
The Sequence Number is a read-only field. When you save a BL item, N4 automatically generates the
Sequence Number to provide a unique identifier for the BL item.
When you save a BL item, N4 creates the default cargo lot for the BL item and displays it in the Cargo Lots tab (on
page 70). If you edit an existing bill of lading, N4 automatically updates the associated default cargo lot.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Item area in the Bill of Lading Item form.
Field Label
Description
Item Number
Enter a unique identifier for the BL item.
For example, you can enter the Item Sequence
Number listed on the BL paperwork provided.
Customer Order Number
Enter the customer order number for the BL item.
Product
Select the product type.
In addition to the Commodity and Quantity fields,
if you select a Product for the BL item and save
the BL item, N4 automatically calculates the Item
Total Weight and also displays the values for the
Package Weight, Package Height, Package
Length, and Package Width fields as specified in
the Product Type form (on page 31) for the
selected Product.
The lookup field displays only the product types
configured at the current scope level. You can add
a new product type using the Product Type form
(on page 31).
Bulk
Select the Bulk check box if the item is a bulk item,
such as loose sand.
If you select the Bulk check box, in the Quantity
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
67
Part 3: Cargo Management
Field Label
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Description
field, enter the quantity of Bulk Units, such as 30
for a bulk item that weighs 30 Kilograms.
If you do not select the Bulk check box, in the
Quantity field, enter the quantity of the non-bulk
items, such as 10 for 10 packages.
Bulk Units
Select the unit of measurement, such as
Kilograms, Liters, or Pounds, for the value
specified in the Quantity field.
N4 enables this field only when you select
the Bulk check box.
Packaging
For non-bulk items only, select the packaging type.
The lookup field displays only the packaging types
configured at the current scope level. You can add
a new packaging type using the Package Type
form (on page 29).
If you select the Bulk check box, N4
changes the Packaging field and all the
related fields listed below as read-only. If
you do not select the Bulk check box,
Packaging is a required field.
Package Weight
For non-bulk items only, enter the weight of a
package.
To enter weight using a specific unit, type
the standard unit symbol, such as lb
(pounds), mt (metric ton), lt (long ton), or st
(short ton), immediately after the numeric
value. For example, to specify weight in
Pounds, enter 50000 lb in the text field.
The default unit of weight in N4 is Kg
(Kilogram).
If you receive the BL information in an EDI and if
the same item is received in different containers,
the Weight field displays the sum of the weight of
the items in all the containers.
Package Height
For non-bulk items only, enter the height of a
package.
Package Length
For non-bulk items only, enter the length of a
package.
Package Width
For non-bulk items only, enter the width of a
package.
Item Total Weight
For non-bulk cargo, N4 calculates the total weight
for the BL item by multiplying the values specified
in the Quantity and Package Weight fields.
For bulk cargo, if the Bulk Unit is a weight unit,
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
68
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Field Label
Description
such as Kilograms, or Pounds, N4 calculates the
Item Total Weight by converting the value
specified in the Quantity field from the unit select
in the Bulk Unit field to the unit for the Item Total
Weight field.
For example, if you select the Bulk Units as
Pounds and enter the Quantity as 1200, N4 sets
the Item Total Weight (kg) as 544 kg.
Commodity Note
Enter notes for the commodity.
For non-bulk cargo, N4 performs the following calculations after you save a BL item. If you enter:
• Quantity + Item Total Weight: N4 calculates the Package Weight.
• Quantity + Package Weight: N4 calculates the Item Total Weight.
• Quantity + Package Weight + Item Total Weight: N4 saves all the values without any calculations.
For bulk cargo, N4 performs the above calculations only if the selected Bulk Unit is a weight unit, such as Kilograms,
or Pounds. If the select Bulk Unit is related to volume, such as Gallons or Liters, you must enter the Item Total
Weight manually.
N4 recalculates these values if you update any of the above values in a BL item.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Details tab in the Bill of Lading Item form.
Field Label
Description
Marks and Numbers
Enter any marks or numbers stenciled on each
package.
Value
Enter the value of the contents of each package.
Currency
Enter the currency in which the value of the
contents is specified.
Customer Product Number
Enter the customer product number, if any.
Notes
Enter the notes for the BL item, if any.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Package Contents tab in the Bill of Lading Item form.
Field Label
Description
Bulk Package
Select the Bulk Package check box if the item is
not bulk but the pieces are bulk, such as bags of
sand.
Piece Bulk Units
Select the unit of measurement, such as
Kilograms, Liters, or Pounds, for the value
specified in the Piece Quantity field.
N4 enables this field only when you select
the Bulk Package check box.
Piece Quantity
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
If you selected the Bulk Package check box, enter
the quantity of Piece Bulk Units for the bulk
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
69
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Field Label
Description
pieces, such as 12 for bags of sand that weigh 12
Kilograms each.
If you did not select the Bulk Package check box,
enter the quantity of the pieces inside a non-bulk
package.
Piece Packaging
For non-bulk pieces only, select the packaging type
for the pieces.
The lookup field displays only the packaging types
configured at the current scope level. You can add
a new packaging type using the Package Type
form (on page 29).
Piece Width
For non-bulk pieces only, enter the width of a
piece.
Piece Height
For non-bulk pieces only, enter the height of a
piece.
Piece Length
For non-bulk pieces only, enter the length of a
piece.
Piece Weight
For non-bulk pieces only, enter the weight of a
piece in Kilograms.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Reefer Requirements tab in the Bill of Lading Item form.
Field Label
Description
Temp. Required
Enter the temperature required for the selected
commodity.
Humidity required
Enter the percentage of humidity required.
Ventilation Required
Enter the ventilation required for the commodity.
In the Reefer Requirements tab, the Temp Min. (C) and Temp Max. (C) fields are view-only fields and N4
automatically fills in these fields using the existing data for the selected commodity.
Cargo Lots tab
Operations
tab
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Operations
Lots tab
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
tab
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Cargo Lots
Cargo
Cargo Lots tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots
The Cargo Lots tab displays the cargo lots associated with the selected bill of lading item. When you save a BL item,
N4 creates the default cargo lot for the BL item and lists it in the Cargo Lots tab. You can double-click a cargo lot to
access the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) and view more details about the selected cargo lot.
In addition, you can perform the following Actions on selected cargo lots on this tab:
• Edit Cargo Lot (on page 115): Edit some of the fields associated with the selected cargo lot record.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
70
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
• Stuff (on page 115): Stuff the selected cargo lot(s) into a container.
• Strip (on page 118): Strip the contents of a container to a yard position.
• Create Delivery Order (on page 121): Create a delivery order for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Record Service Event: Record a service event for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Unload
Unload Vessel (on page 123): Unload cargo from a vessel to a yard position.
• Unload
Unload Truck (on page 124): Unload cargo from a truck to a yard position.
• Unload
Unload Rail (on page 125): Unload cargo from a train or a railcar to a yard position.
• Load
Load Vessel (on page 126): Load cargo from the yard to the specified vessel visit.
• Load
Load Truck (on page 127): Load cargo from the yard to the specified truck visit.
• Load
Load Rail (on page 129): Load cargo from the yard to the specified train visit.
• Manifest
Manifest Container (on page 131): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a container.
• Manifest
Manifest Vessel (on page 132): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel.
• Manifest
Manifest Rail (on page 134): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a rail.
• Other
Manufacture Cargo (on page 135): Create cargo lots for cargo manufactured at the facility.
• Other
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity (on page 136): Adjust the quantity of the selected cargo lot.
N4 records the adjustment as a discrepancy against the selected cargo lot record.
• Other
Transload (on page 137): Transload the selected cargo lot(s) to another container.
• Other
Identify Lot (on page 138): Identify the contents of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Other
Cancel Manifest (on page 139): Cancel the manifest for the selected cargo lot.
• Other Split BL (on page 140): Split the bill of lading associated with the selected cargo lot into smaller BLs for
ease of processing.
• Other
Re-consign BL (on page 141): Re-consign the selected cargo lots to a new or existing BL.
• Record Damages (on page 142): Record damages for the selected cargo lot.
Identified Lots tab
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations Cargo
Identified Lots tab
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Lots tab
Items tab
Operations
tab
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
Lots tab
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Identified
Identified Lots
Bill of Lading Item form
Identified
The Identified Lots tab displays the identified cargo lots associated with the selected bill of lading item. For a
quantified (non-bulk) cargo BL item, you can add or edit identified cargo lots from this tab.
You cannot add an identified cargo lot for a BL item for measured (bulk) cargo.
When you save an identified cargo lot, N4 decreases the Quantity of the default cargo lot for the BL item by one. Use
the Cargo Lots tab (on page 70) to view the default cargo lot for the BL item.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
71
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Cargo Lot Identified form
Operations Cargo Bills of Lading
Lots tab Cargo Lot Identified form
Bills of Lading view
Operations Cargo Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view
Identified Lots tab Cargo Lot Identified form
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations Unit Bills of Lading
tab Cargo Lot Identified form
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations Unit Bills of Lading
Lots tab Cargo Lot Identified form
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Bill of Lading Item form
Items tab
Identified
Identified Lots
Bill of Lading Item form
Identified
The Cargo Lot Identified form enables you to add or edit identified cargo for the selected bill of lading item.
Item Split BL form
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Operations
form
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
form
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Actions
Items tab
Items tab
Actions
Actions
Items tab
Split BL
Split BL
Split BL
Actions
Item Split BL form
Item Split BL
Item Split BL form
Split BL
Item Split BL
In N4, you can move Bill of Lading (BL) items from one BL to another BL, this is referred to as splitting the BL. N4
allows you to split BL items from one BL to another existing BL or to a new BL. For more information on the restrictions,
see Cargo Split BL form (on page 140).
To split the selected BL Items:
1. In the Items tab, select the BL items that you want to split to another BL.
2. Select Actions
Split BL.
3. In the Item Split BL form:
a. In the BL Number field, enter the ID of a new or existing BL.
b. Click Save.
If successful, N4 moves the selected BL items from the selected BL to the specified BL.
In addition to the BL items, you can directly split cargo lots (on page 140) from one BL to another existing BL or new
BL. The selected cargo lots must be associated with the same BL. In this case, N4 automatically creates the BL Items
for the selected cargo lots.
You must have the Cargo Lot - Split BL privilege to access the Actions
Split BL option.
BL Item Re-consign BL form
Operations Cargo
consign BL form
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations Cargo Bills of Lading
Item Re-consign BL form
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations Unit
consign BL form
Bills of Lading
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Items tab
Actions
Items tab
Items tab
Re-consign BL
Actions
Actions
BL Item Re-
Re-consign BL
Re-consign BL
BL
BL Item Re-
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
72
Part 3: Cargo Management
Operations Unit Bills of Lading
Re-consign BL form
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Actions
Re-consign BL
BL Item
In N4, you can re-consign BL items from one BL to a new BL or an existing BL.
Prerequisites
• You must have the Cargo Lot - Re-consign BL privilege to access the Actions
Re-consign BL option.
To re-consign the selected BL Items:
1. In the Items tab, select the BL items that you want to re-consign to another BL.
2. Select Actions
Re-consign BL.
3. In the BL Item Re-consign BL form:
a. In the BL Number field, enter the ID of a new or existing BL.
b. Click Save.
If successful, N4 moves the entire quantity and all the cargo lots associated with the selected BL Item to the specified
BL. If a matching BL Item exists in the specified BL, N4 adds the Quantity to the existing BL Item; otherwise, it creates
a new BL Item.
In addition to the BL items, you can directly re-consign cargo lots (on page 141) from one BL to another existing BL or
new BL. The selected cargo lots may or may not be associated with the same BL. In this case, N4 automatically
creates the BL Items for the selected cargo lots.
Notes
• When you split a BL item (on page 72), the Master BL and the Target BL must match at all times. For example, split
a BL item to a new BL. Now, you can only spit the BL items from the same BL to this new BL and not from any other
BL. For more information on the restrictions, see Cargo Split BL form (on page 140). However, when you reconsign a BL item, N4 allows you to move BL items among BLs without any restrictions.
• You can use the CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN) (on page 40) setting to determine whether the items of
one BL item should be merged or moved to the other BL item having identical commodity.
3.1.1.2 Units tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Units tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Units tab
Units tab
Units tab
The Units tab displays the units associated with the selected bill of lading. You can add new units, or edit and delete
existing units from this view.
You must use this tab to associate units with a bill of lading. N4 does not allow you to associate a bill of lading to
a unit from the Shipment Details form if the INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING) (on page 39) setting is
set to true.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
73
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Units form
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Units tab
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading form
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Units form
Units tab
Units tab
Bill of Lading Units form
Bill of Lading Units form
Units tab
Bill of Lading Units form
The Bill of Lading Units form enables you to add unit(s) to the selected bill of lading.
To add or edit unit(s) for the selected bill of lading:
1. In the Unit Nbr field, enter the unit number of the unit you want to add to the bill of lading.
2. Click Save.
The specified unit must:
• Exist at the current scope level.
• Not be a duplicate of a unit associated with the selected bill of lading.
• Have the same value as the selected bill of lading in the following fields:
▪ Carrier Visit
▪ Line Operator
▪ Port of Discharge
▪ Port of Load
When successful, N4:
• Adds the unit record to the Units tab (on page 73) in the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74).
• Adds the BL record to the Bills of Lading tab in the Unit Inspector.
• Adds the BL Nbr field to the Status area of the Unit Inspector.
• Copies the following fields from the BL to the unit, if the unit does not have any value specified in these fields:
▪ Shipper
▪ Consignee
▪ Bonded Trucking Company
▪ Inbond
▪ Exam
3.1.2 Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
The Bill of Lading Inspector displays the details of the selected bill of lading and enables you to perform various
actions on it. The Bill of Lading Inspector provides a view of all aspects of the selected bill of lading from the
perspective of the facility in the current scope. You can keep the Bill of Lading Inspector open at all times as you
work in other views and forms, and you can move and resize it as needed.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
74
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
To reflect the updates from the system, N4 refreshes the information displayed in the Bill of Lading Inspector every
30 seconds.
The basic information for a bill of lading displays in the following areas:
• Details: The left area displays the bill of lading details, such as the bill of lading number, line operator, category, and
carrier visit for the selected bill of lading.
• Routing: The right area displays the routing information, such as POL and POD for the selected bill of lading.
The Details pane (on page 78) displays additional bill of lading information below the
button.
To display the Details pane:
1. Click
.
2. From the list on the left, select the type of information to display.
To perform actions:
1. Click Actions to display the menu.
2. Select the required menu option.
In addition to the actions that are also available from the Bills of Lading view (on page 59), the Actions menu in the
Bill of Lading Inspector displays the Edit Bill of Lading action that you can use to edit the details (on page 62) of the
selected bill of lading.
Bill of Lading Inspector Columns
The following tables list the columns on the various tabs in the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74).
BL Releases Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Changed
Changed
X
Changer
Changer
X
Created
Created
X
Creator
Creator
X
Disposition Code
Disposition Code
X
Disposition Seq Number
Disposition Seq Number
X
Hold/Perm
Holds/Permissions
X
Notes
Notes
X
Post Date
Post Date
X
Qty
Quantity
X
Qty Type
Quantity Type
X
Reference
Reference
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Group?
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
75
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
History, Event Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Billable
Billable Event
X
Changes
Changes
X
Complex
Complex
X
Description
Description
X
Edi Batch Nbr
EDI Batch Number
X
Event ID
Event Type ID
X
Extract Batch
Billing Extract Batch Id
X
Facility
Facility
X
Notes
X
Operator
X
Order Nbr
X
Qty
Quantity
X
Qty Unit
Quantity Unit
X
Recorder
Recorder
X
Related Entity Class
X
Related Entity Id
X
Responsible Party
Responsible Party
X
Target
Target Entity
X
Time
X
Yard
Yard
X
Holds/Perms Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Appl By
Applied By
X
Appl To
Applied To
X
Appl To Enty
Applied To Entity
X
Applied On
Applied On
X
Description
Description
X
Guarded By
Guarded By
X
Guarded By Enty
Guarded By Entity
X
Hold/Perm
Hold/Permission
X
Hold/Perm View
Hold/Perm View
X
Note
Note
X
Ref ID
Reference ID
X
Ref Required
Reference Id Required
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
76
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Short Label
Rule Type
Long Label
Sorting?
Rule Type
X
Status
X
Type
X
Unique Ref
Has Unique Reference Id
X
Upd By
Updated By
X
Upd Note
Update Note
X
Upd On
Updated On
X
Upd Ref ID
X
Items Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Bulk
Bulk
X
Commodity
Commodity
X
Commodity Note
Commodity Note
X
Contents
Contents
Damaged?
Damaged?
Item Nbr
Item Number
X
Piece Qty
Piece Quantity
X
Product
Product
X
Qty
Quantity
X
Sequence
Sequence Number
X
Total Weight
Item Total Weight
X
Units
Bulk Units
Units Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Changed
X
Changer
X
Created
X
Creator
X
Unit BL Nbr
X
Unit Category
Unit Category
Group?
X
1-Unit
Unit Frght Kind
X
4-Contents
Unit
Hazardous?
X
4-Contents
Unit Hzd
UNNbrs
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
4-Contents
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
77
Part 3: Cargo Management
Short Label
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Long Label
Sorting?
Group?
Unit I/B Dclrd
Visit
X
Routing
Unit IMDG
X
4-Contents
X
1-Unit
Unit O/B Dclrd
Visit
X
Routing
Unit POD
X
Routing
Unit POL
X
Routing
Unit Nbr
Unit Nbr
3.1.2.1 Details pane in the Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
The Details pane in the Bill of Lading Inspector, displays additional bill of lading information in the following tabs:
• BL Releases (on page 78): Displays the releases granted for the bill of lading.
You can add new BL releases, and edit or delete existing releases on this tab.
• History, Events (on page 79): Displays the events recorded for the bill of lading.
You can record new events or view details of existing events on this tab.
• Holds/Perms (on page 80): Displays holds/permissions, if any, for the selected bill of lading.
You can add new holds/permissions, show details, grant permissions, and release holds on this tab.
• Items (on page 66): Displays the items associated with the selected bill of lading.
You can add new items, and edit or delete existing items on this tab.
• Units (on page 73): Displays the units associated with the selected bill of lading.
You can add new units, or edit and delete existing units on this tab.
BL Releases tab
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
BL Releases tab
BL Releases tab
The BL Releases tab displays the releases granted for the selected bill of lading. You can add, edit, or delete BL
releases from this tab.
US Customs holds is an example of holds/permissions that may be required for a Bill of Lading. For information about
US Customs holds setup and configuration, see Configure EDI for US Customs Holds in the Navis N4: EDI, Billing, and
Services Management.
Bill of Lading Release form
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
BL Releases tab
Bill of Lading Release form
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
78
Part 3: Cargo Management
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
BL Releases tab
Bill of Lading Release form
The Bill of Lading Release form enables you to add or edit a BL release.
To add or edit a BL release:
1. In the Quantity field, enter the number of packages released in the BL release.
2. In the Reference field, enter the reference number recorded on the BL release.
3. Optionally, in the Notes field, enter any notes for the BL release.
4. Click Save.
History, Events tab
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
History, Events tab
History, Events tab
The History, Events tab in the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74) displays the events recorded for the selected bill
of lading. The Changes field displays the values that changed per the event for the selected bill of lading.
To record an event for a bill of lading manually, use the Record Service Event form (on page 79).
To view the details of an event, double-click the event or use the Action
Show Details option.
When a billable event is extracted to the Chargeable Unit Events view, N4 associates the Batch ID with the event.
You can display the Extract Batch column to view the Batch ID associated with the event. For more information on
displaying a column, see Hiding and displaying columns.
Record Service Event form
Operations
form
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
History, Events tab
History, Events tab
Record Service Event
Record Service Event form
The Record Service Event form enables you to record a service event for the selected bill of lading.
The Description and Billable Event fields in this form are read-only. N4 uses these fields to provide a short
description of the event and indicate whether the event is billable to the customer.
The Field Updates area in this form displays any fields that require user input. The fields displayed in this area depend
on the effects defined for the selected event. For more information, see Effects tab.
To record a service event:
1. From the Event Type ID drop-down list, select the service event that you want to record for the selected entity.
The drop-down list displays only the service event types defined at the current scope level that apply to the selected
target entity and for which you have the required privilege. For more information on adding a service event type, see
Event Type form.
2. Optionally, select the Service Order Number associated with the event.
The Service Order Number drop-down list displays only the service orders that have either the In Progress or the
New status. It does not display a service order if the status is either Completed or Cancelled.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
79
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
When you record an event with a service order number, N4 updates the service order item status to Completed. For
more information, see Service Order Inspector Units tab.
N4 extracts the selected service order number to the Service Order field in the Chargeable Unit Events view for
the event.
3. From the Responsible Party lookup field, select the party responsible. If N4 automatically fills in the Responsible
Party field using the value specified in the Billing Party field in the Service Order form, the value cannot be edited.
N4 extracts this value to the Payee Id field in the Chargeable Unit Events view for the event.
4. Optionally, record the Quantity and Quantity Unit associated with the selected event type.
For example, if you have an event that records power supplied for reefers, you can enter a value in the Quantity
field and select the unit of time (days or hours) in the Quantity Unit field.
5. Optionally, in the Note field, enter any notes for the service event.
6. Optionally, in the Apply Date field, enter the date when the event is performed.
By default, N4 displays the current system date in this field.
7. Click OK.
N4 displays the recorded service event for the selected entity on the History, Event tab.
If the selected service event type is bulk-applicable, but a validation prevents you from recording it for one or more of
the selected items, N4 does not record the service event for any of the selected items.
In addition, if N4 is configured to automatically update a field, add/release a hold, or grant/cancel a permission, per a
service event type effect or auto update rule, N4 attempts to perform these tasks. If the change is unsuccessful, N4
displays an error message. But for an auto update rule, if any of the following are true then N4 does nothing:
• To release a hold when the hold is not active for the target entity.
• To cancel a permission when the permission is not granted for the target entity (permission will still be required).
Holds/Perms tab
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
Holds/Perms tab
Holds/Perms tab
The Holds/Perms tab displays the holds/permissions for the selected bill of lading. You can add or edit a hold/
permission for the selected unit on this tab. When you edit a hold/permission, if you have not selected a hold or
permission or if the status of the selected permission is Required, N4 disables the
information, see Update Hold/Permission form (Edit mode).
(Edit) button. For more
In addition, you can use the following Actions menu options to:
• Show Details: View the details of the selected hold/permission and the list of events affected by it.
You can also double-click a hold/permission to view the details and the list of events affected by it.
• Grant Permission (on page 82): Grant the selected permission.
You can only grant REQUIRED permissions.
• Release Hold: Release the selected hold.
You can only release ACTIVE holds.
• Cancel Permission: Cancel the selected permission.
You can only cancel GRANTED permissions.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
80
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
The Holds/Perms tab also displays the prerequisite events associated with the selected bill of lading. A prerequisite
event has the PRE_REQUISITE status. Use the Actions Show Details option to view the details of the prerequisite
event and the list of events affected by it.
You must record the prerequisite service event for the selected bill of lading before you can record the service events
listed on the Affected Event Types tab.
To record a prerequisite service event, on the History, Events tab (on page 79) for the selected bill of lading, click
or use the Actions Record Service Event (on page 79) option.
Update Hold/Permission form
Operations
form
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Bill of Lading Inspector
Holds/Perms tab
Holds/Perms tab
Update Hold/Permission
Update Hold/Permission form
The Update Hold/Permission form enables you to add/release holds, or grant/cancel permissions for the selected bill
of lading.
Prerequisites
• In this form, you can select a hold/permission in step 2 only if it exists at the current scope level and has a service
business rule defined. For more information, see Holds/Permissions view.
To update a Hold/Permission:
1. From the Action drop-down list, select one of the following options:
▪ Add Hold: Add a hold for the selected bill of lading.
▪ Release Hold: Release an ACTIVE hold for the bill of lading.
▪ Grant Permission: Grant a REQUIRED permission for the bill of lading.
▪ Cancel Permission: Cancel a GRANTED permission for the bill of lading.
2. From the Hold/Permission drop-down list, select the hold that you want to add/release or the permission that you
want to grant/cancel.
The Description and Target Entity Type fields are view-only and display information about the selected hold/
permission.
3. From the Relation to Referenced Guardian drop-down list, select the guardian entity type for the selected hold/
permission.
For a list of target entities and the related guardian entity types, see Target and guardian entity types.
4. From the Referenced Guardian Entity drop-down list, select the specific guardian entity for the hold/permission.
The values in the drop-down list depend on the option selected in step 3.
The Relation to Referenced Guardian and Referenced Guardian Entity drop-down list are enabled only
for guarded holds/permissions. For more information, see Rule types.
The Has Unique Reference Id and Reference Id Required check boxes are read-only and display the options set
at the time the hold/permission was defined. For more information, see Hold/Permission Type form.
5. If the Reference Id Required check box is selected, you must enter a reference ID in the Reference ID field, and if
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
81
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Copy Bill of Lading form
the Has Unique Reference Id check box is selected, the reference ID entered in the Reference ID field must be
unique for the entity and hold/permission combination.
6. Optionally, in the Note field, enter a note for any special considerations for the hold/permission.
7. Click OK.
When updating a hold/permission:
• If you select multiple bills of lading in a list view and a validation prevents you from applying the hold/permission to
one or more selected bills of lading, N4 still applies the hold/permission to the other selected bills of lading.
• If the selected hold/permission already exists as an ACTIVE hold or a REQUIRED permission for a selected bill of
lading, N4 does not apply the same hold/permission twice.
• If a hold/permission that requires a unique reference ID already exists as an ACTIVE hold or a REQUIRED
permission for a selected bill of lading, N4 does not apply the same hold/permission twice if the reference ID that
you specify is the same as the reference ID that already exists.
Notes
• You can edit the Reference ID and the Note fields for an active/released hold or a granted/canceled permission.
However, you cannot edit a required permission. For more information, see Update Hold/Permission form (Edit
mode)
Grant Permission form
You can access the Grant Permission form from the Actions menu in the Holds/Perms tab.
The Grant Permission form enables you to grant the selected permission for the target entity such as unit, vessel visit,
train visit, bill of lading, or an order (booking, EDO, or ELO).
The form displays the following details for the selected permission:
• Type
• Name
• Description
• Guardian entity
• Guarded entity
• Reference ID must be unique or not
• Reference ID is required
If a reference ID:
• Is not required for the selected permission, click OK to grant the permission.
• Is required for the selected permission, you must enter a reference ID in the Reference ID field and click OK.
For more information, see Hold/Permission Type form.
3.1.3 Copy Bill of Lading form
Operations
Cargo
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Bills of Lading view
Bills of Lading view
Actions
Actions
Copy Bill of Lading
Copy Bill of Lading
Copy Bill of Lading form
Copy Bill of Lading form
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
82
Part 3: Cargo Management
Bills of Lading view
Service Order form
Prerequisites
• You must have the Bills of Lading - Copy privilege to access the Copy Bill of Lading action.
In N4, you can copy the details of an existing bill of lading (BL) to create a new BL. When you copy a bill of lading, N4
copies the header information, such as the Category, Line Operator, Vessel Visit, POD, and POL of the selected BL.
It also copies the BL Items from the selected BL to the new BL; however, it only creates the default cargo lots for the
copied BL Items. N4 does not copy any other cargo lots associated with the selected BL.
As opposed to the Split BL (on page 72) action, the Copy Bill of Lading action creates a new BL with no
association with the original BL.
To copy a bill of lading:
1. In the Bills of Lading view, select the bill of lading you want to copy.
2. Select Actions
Copy Bill of Lading.
3. In the Copy Bill of Lading form:
a. The BL Number field displays the ID of the selected bill of lading.
b. In the New BL Number field enter the ID of the new bill of lading that you want to create.
c. Click Save.
3.1.4 Service Order form
Operations
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Actions
Create Service Order
Operations
Order form
Cargo
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Operations
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Actions
Operations
form
Unit
Bills of Lading
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Service Order form
Actions
Create Service Order
Create Service Order
Service
Service Order form
Actions
Create Service Order
Service Order
The Service Order form enables you to add a service order for the selected bill(s) of lading.
To create a service order:
1. In the Service Order Number field, enter an ID that uniquely identifies the service order in the system.
2. From the Billing Party lookup field, select the organization paying for the service.
3. Enter any optional information for the service order.
4. Click Save. N4 creates the service order and clears the fields in the form for you to create another service order.
The new service order is available in the Service Orders view and includes the bills of lading selected when you
created the service order.
In addition, N4 adds units that are associated with the selected bills of lading to the new service order. The units must
be in an Advised, Inbound, EC/In, or Yard transit state.
The table lists the optional fields in the Service Order form:
Field Label
Order Line
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Description
Select the line operator the service order
work is for.
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
83
Part 3: Cargo Management
Field Label
Bills of Lading view
Service Order form
Description
If the Billing Party is a line operator, enter
the same line operator here.
Completion Date
Enter the date by when the work for the
service order must finish.
Notes
Enter any miscellaneous notes for the
service order.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
84
3.2 Delivery Orders view
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Prerequisites
• To access the Delivery Orders view, you need to assign the Delivery Order - View privilege to your user role.
A delivery order is a group of one or multiple bill of lading (BL) items that represent cargo to be picked up by trucks or
be placed on railcars for departure from the terminal for the same consignee. The BL items included in a delivery order
may be associated with the same or different bills of lading. Usually, the consignee for a shipment creates or provides
the delivery order. You can use a delivery order to manage cargo lot pickup by a truck or several trucks arriving at the
terminal.
If you use delivery orders for Deliver Break-Bulk (DB) gate transactions, N4 updates the Order Status when the truck
visit and the associated gate transaction are completed. However, if the delivery order is created without cargo lot
details, the Order Status remains New. N4 updates the Order Status based on the Cargo Delivery Order Item field.
Therefore, in your gate configuration, you must include the Cargo Delivery Order Item field for the Deliver Break-Bulk
(DB) gate transaction at the ingate stage.
You can use the Deliver Orders view to add, edit, and delete delivery orders. In addition, you can use the Actions
Cancel Delivery Order (on page 90) option to cancel the selected delivery order. If you select multiple records in the
list view, N4 disables this action.
To add a new record:
Click
.
To edit or delete a record:
1. In the list view, select the record(s) that you want to edit or delete.
2. Do one of the following:
▪ Click
to edit a selected record.
▪ Click
to delete the selected record(s).
▪ N4allows you to delete a BL even if it is assigned to a unit/cargo lot provided the unit’s transit state is either
Advised, Inbound, or Retired. However, N4 does not allow you to delete a BL if some or all of the related cargo/
units/containers have one of the following transit states EC/IN, EC/OUT, Yard, or Loaded. Instead, N4 displays
an error message, Cannot delete bill of lading {0}, as it is associated with Units
In This Section
Delivery Orders Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cancel Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Delivery Order Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
85
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Orders Columns
Delivery Orders Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Billing Party
Billing Party
X
X
Cancel Date
Cancel Date
X
X
Cancel Notes
Cancel Notes
X
X
Carrier Visit
Carrier Visit Ref X
X
Changed
Changed
X
X
Changer
Changer
X
X
Created
Created
X
X
Creator
Creator
X
X
Cust Ref
Customer
Reference
X
X
Delivery Party
Delivery Party
X
End By Date
End By Date
X
X
Facility
Facility
X
X
Forwarding
Agent
Forwarding
Agent
X
Mode
Carrier Mode
X
X
Notes
Notes
X
X
Notify Party
Notify Party
X
Order Nbr
Service Order
Number
X
X
Order Status
Order Status
X
X
PIN
PIN
X
X
Start By Date
Start By Date
X
X
Group
Routing
Routing
3.2.1 Delivery Order form
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
You can use the Delivery Order form to add a new delivery order (on page 85) or edit an existing delivery order. A
delivery order represents the cargo to be picked up by truck or placed on railcars for departure from the terminal for a
single consignee.
To add or edit a delivery order:
1. The Delivery Order Number is an auto-generated number that you cannot edit.
2. From the Billing Party lookup field, select the organization responsible for paying for the delivery order.
The lookup field displays the organizations that exist in N4. To add a new organization, use the Configuration
Organizations menu.
3. Enter any optional information for the delivery order.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
86
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
4. Click Save.
After you save a delivery order, you can add delivery order items.
The table lists the optional fields in the Delivery Order form:
Field Label
Carrier Mode
Description
Select the inbound mode of transport for the
cargo.
N4 uses the selected carrier mode
(Vessel, Truck, or Train) to
determine the values for the Carrier
Visit lookup field.
Carrier Visit
Select the carrier visit (vessel visit, truck
visit, or the train visit) for the delivery order.
N4 use the value selected in the
Carrier Mode field above, to
determine the values displayed in
this list. The facility for the carrier
visit must be the current facility and
the carrier visit must not be in the
Departed, Closed, Canceled or
Archived phase.
Start By Date
Enter the date by when the work for the
delivery order must begin.
For more information on adding data and
time data, see Entering dates and Entering
time.
End By Date
Enter the date by when the work for the
delivery order must finish.
Customer Reference
Enter the customer reference ID for the
delivery order.
Contact Details
Click the Add/Edit Contact Details button
to add contact information for the billing
party or other organizations associated with
the delivery order, such as a forwarding
agent or a notify party.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
87
Part 3: Cargo Management
Field Label
PIN
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
Description
Enter the PIN (on page 65), PIN (on page
88) associated with the delivery order.
You can enter up to 20
alphanumeric characters in this
field.
You can view the PIN assigned to a delivery
order in the Delivery Orders view (on page
85) and on the Details area in the Delivery
Order Inspector (on page 91). In addition,
when you assign a PIN to a delivery order,
N4 records the
SERVICE_ORDER_PROPERTY_UPDATE
event against the delivery order. You can
view this event on the History, Events tab
of the Delivery Order Inspector for the
delivery order.
Notes
Enter any miscellaneous notes for the
delivery order.
PIN
The PIN is a unique identification for a unit, bill of lading, or delivery order that a line operator can use to validate that a
truck driver is picking up the correct container or break-bulk cargo.
For unit
In N4, you can use the Delivery Requirements form to assign or edit the PIN for a unit. These privileges control the
ability to view and edit PIN associated with a unit:
• Pin - Check: You can check whether a PIN is assigned to a unit but you cannot see the actual number.
• Pin - View: You can view the PIN assigned to a unit, but you cannot edit the PIN.
• Pin - Edit: You can view and edit the PIN assigned to a unit.
• Deny access to Unit field PIN Number: You cannot view the PIN Number field or column on forms and list views.
If the user’s role excludes the privileges PIN - Check, PIN - Edit, and PIN – View, then on the Units view, the
PIN Number column displays the data as "****".
A line operator can control:
• Whether to use PINs for all units operated by the line operator
• Whether to assign a PIN for each unit or allow N4 to generate a PIN automatically when the unit is first created, for
example using a stow plan
Use the Line Operator form
Booking Rules tab to specify these restrictions.
A line operator may receive the PIN from an EDI trading partner or it may be generated in N4. If the line operators
assign a PIN to a unit they can specify an alphanumeric value. If N4 generates the PIN, it consists of only digits but the
value is stored as a string value.
PIN is available as part of the Unit reporting entity and can be included in various reports.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
88
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
You can configure the Pin Number field on a gate form at the outgate stage for a deliver gate transaction to force the
truck driver to enter a PIN. You can include the RejectPinNbrMismatch, RejectPinNbrNotAssigned, and
RejectPinNbrNotEntered business tasks in your gate configuration to control the delivery of a unit using the PIN.
For break-bulk cargo
You can use the Bill of Lading form (on page 62) to associate a PIN to a BL. To associate a PIN to a Delivery Order,
you can use either the Delivery Order form (on page 86), Delivery Order form (on page 86) or the Create Delivery
Order form (on page 121).
If you have the privilege that allows you to edit a BL or a delivery order, you can edit the PIN assigned to the BL
or the delivery order.
You can include the Pin Number field as part of your Deliver Break-Bulk gate transaction to force the truck driver to
enter a PIN. You can include the RejectPinNbrMismatch, RejectPinNbrNotAssigned, and
RejectPinNbrNotEntered business tasks in your gate configuration to control the delivery of break-bulk cargo
using the PIN.
3.2.1.1 Contact Details form
Operations Cargo
Details form
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
Add/Edit Contact Details button
Contact
You can use the Contact Details form to specify the contact details for various organizations, such as the billing party,
forwarding agent, or notify party, associated with the delivery order. You can also use the Contacts tab (on page 94)
in the Delivery Order Inspector (on page 91) to add or edit contact details after you have saved the delivery order
record.
To add contact details:
1. Select one of the following as the Address Type that you want to add for the delivery order:
▪ Bill To
▪ Deliver To
▪ Forwarding Agent
▪ Notify Party
2. From the Contact ID lookup field, select the organization you want to associate with the delivery order.
The lookup field displays the organizations that exist in N4. To add a new organization, use the Configuration
Organizations menu.
3. Enter the other optional contact details.
If available, N4 automatically fills in the available information for the selected Contact ID. You can then edit
these fields according to your requirements.
4. Click Add.
N4 displays the record in the CONTACT DETAILS area at the bottom.
5. Click OK.
You can click Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes.
After you add the contact details, if you select the record in the CONTACT DETAILS area, N4 fills in the available
information in the various fields that you can edit, if required.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
89
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Cancel Delivery Order form
In the CONTACT DETAILS area, you can use the
selected record.
button to add another record and the
button to delete the
You cannot use the Cancel button to undo a delete action.
3.2.1.2 Order Item tab
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
Order Item tab
The Order Item tab displays the order items associated with the selected delivery order.
You can add, edit, and delete order items from this tab.
Delivery Order Item form
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order form
Order Item tab
Delivery Order Item form
You can use the Delivery Order Item form to add or edit a delivery order item. In N4, a delivery order item represents
a group of cargo lots that may be associated with the same or different bills of lading (BLs).
To add a delivery order item:
1. From the Bill of Lading lookup field, select the BL for the delivery order item.
2. From the Bl Item lookup field, select the specific BL Item from the BL selected in step 1 if the BL Item has only a
single cargo lot. If the BL Item has multiple cargo lots, select the cargo lot from the Cargo Lot lookup field.
N4 automatically fills in the Item Available Quantity field using the BL Item.
3. Optionally, from the Cargo Lot lookup field select the cargo lot you want to associate with the delivery order.
When a BL item has multiple cargo lots, select the required cargo lot from the Cargo Lot lookup field instead of
selecting the BL Item. If you do not this, you will see an error when you perform the truck load for the delivery order
because N4 does not know the cargo lot to be loaded on to the truck. When you select the cargo lot, N4 populates
the corresponding BL Item in the Bl Item lookup field.
This lookup field does not display cargo lots that are departed (T-State = Departed).
If you select a cargo lot, N4 automatically fills in the other fields, such as the Lot Available Quantity, Vessel Visit,
Commodity, Product, and Package Type.
If the BL Item is for Bulk cargo, N4 also selects the Bulk check box and displays the unit in the Quantity Unit field.
4. Optionally, in the Notes field, enter any notes for the delivery order item.
5. Click Save.
3.2.2 Cancel Delivery Order form
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Actions
Cancel Delivery Order
Cancel Delivery Order form
You can use the Cancel Delivery Order form to cancel the selected delivery order. You can select only one delivery
order at a time. If you select multiple deliver orders in the list view, N4 disables the option.
To cancel the selected delivery order:
1. In the Cancel Notes field, enter a brief note for the cancelation.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
90
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
2. Click Save.
N4 updates the:
• Order Status = Cancelled
• Cancel Date = Current date
You can view these changes in the Details area in the Delivery Order Inspector (on page 91).
3.2.3 Delivery Order Inspector
Cargo
Operations
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
The Delivery Order Inspector displays the details of the selected delivery order and enables you to perform various
actions on it. The Delivery Order Inspector provides a view of all the aspects of a delivery order from the perspective
of the facility in the current scope. You can keep the Delivery Order Inspector open at all times as you work in other
views and forms, and you can move and resize it as needed.
The basic information for the delivery order displays in the following areas:
• Delivery Order: The left area displays the deliver order number.
• Details: The right area displays the delivery order details, such as the order status, billing party, carrier visit, carrier
mode, and the dates associated with the delivery order.
The Details pane displays additional delivery order information below the
button.
To display the Details pane:
1. Click
.
2. From the list on the left, select the type of information to display.
To perform actions:
1. Click Actions to display the menu.
2. Select the required menu option.
In addition to the actions that are also available from the Delivery Orders view (on page 85), the Actions menu in the
Delivery Order Inspector displays the Edit Delivery Order action that you can use to edit the details (on page 86),
edit the details (on page 86) of the selected delivery order.
3.2.3.1 Delivery Order Inspector Columns
The following tables list the columns on the various tabs in the Delivery Order Inspector (on page 91).
Contacts Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Addr Type
Address Type
X
Address1
Contact Address Line1
X
Address2
Contact Address Line2
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
91
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Address3
Contact Address Line3
X
Changed
Changed
X
Changer
Changer
X
City
Contact City
X
Contact Name
Contact Name
X
Country
Contact Country
X
Created
Created
X
Creator
Creator
X
Email
Contact Email Address
X
Fax
Contact Fax
X
ID
Contact ID
X
Mail Code
Contact Mail Code
X
SMS
Contact SMS
X
State Code
Contact State
X
Telephone
Contact Telephone
X
Website
Contact Website URL
X
History, Event Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Billable
Billable Event
X
Changes
Changes
X
Complex
Complex
X
Description
Description
X
Edi Batch Nbr
EDI Batch Number
X
Event ID
Event Type ID
X
Extract Batch
Billing Extract Batch Id
X
Facility
Facility
X
Notes
X
Operator
X
Order Nbr
X
Qty
Quantity
X
Qty Unit
Quantity Unit
X
Recorder
Recorder
X
Related Entity Class
X
Related Entity Id
X
Responsible Party
Responsible Party
X
Target
Target Entity
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
92
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
Short Label
Long Label
Time
Sorting?
X
Yard
Yard
X
History, Events tab
You can access the Event History tab from various inspectors.
The History, Events tab displays the events recorded for the selected entity such as unit, container, chassis,
accessory, vessel visit, train visit, bill of lading, or an order (booking, EDO, or ELO). You can record service events for
the selected entity on this tab. For more information, see Event Types view.
In addition, when you perform certain tasks in N4 or in XPS, such as discharge a container or edit the routing
information for a booking, N4 records the associated built-in events on the tab for the affected entity.
To view the details of an event, double-click the event or use the Action Show Details option. The Changes field
displays the values that changed per the event for a unit, booking, EDO, or ELO, such as the old and new unit position
for a unit discharge event.
When a billable event is extracted to the Chargeable Unit Events view, N4 associates the Batch ID with the event.
You can display the Extract Batch column to view the Batch ID associated with the event. For more information on
displaying a column, see Hiding and displaying columns.
For break-bulk units that are associated with cargo lots, N4 also displays any cargo lot events in the History, Events
tab for the unit.
You can see the Hatch Clerk's ID in the XPS log, but it does not appear in N4 by default unless you use the Radio
Server. To make the Hatch Clerk ID visible in N4 without the Radio Server, you can implement a customized code
extension of the type ENTITY_LIFECYCLE_INTERCEPTION with the name UpdateMoveEventAppliedByInfo.
Order Items Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Bl Item Sequence
Bl Item
Bl Nbr
Bill of Lading
Bulk
Bulk
X
Changed
Changed
X
Changer
Changer
X
Cmdy
Commodity
Created
Created
X
Creator
Creator
X
Notes
Notes
X
Pkg Type
Package Type
Product
Product
Qty Ordered
Quantity Ordered
X
Qty Unit
Quantity Unit
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
X
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
93
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
Short Label
Long Label
Status
Order Status
Vessel Visit
Vessel Visit
Sorting?
X
3.2.3.2 Details pane in the Deliver Order Inspector
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
The Details pane in the Delivery Order Inspector, displays additional delivery order information in the following tabs:
• Contacts (on page 94): Displays the contact information of the various organizations associated with the delivery
order, such as the billing party, forwarding agent, or the deliver to party.
You can add new contacts or edit and delete existing contacts on this tab.
• History, Events: Displays the events recorded for the delivery order.
You can record new events or view details of existing events on this tab.
• Order Items (on page 90): Displays the order items associated with the delivery order.
You can record new order items or edit and delete existing order items on this tab.
Contacts tab
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
Contacts tab
The Contacts tab displays the contacts associated with the selected delivery order. From this tab, you can view, add,
edit, or delete contact information for the delivery order.
Delivery Order Address form
Operations
Cargo
Delivery Orders
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
Contacts tab
Delivery Order Address form
The Delivery Order Address form enables you to associate an address with the delivery order.
To add an address:
1. Select one of the following as the Address Type that you want to add for the delivery order:
▪ Bill To - If selected, the Contract ID must match the Billing Party specified for the delivery order.
▪ Deliver To
▪ Forwarding Agent
▪ Notify Party
2. From the Contact ID lookup field, select the organization you want to associate with the delivery order.
The lookup field displays the organizations that exist in N4. To add a new organization, use the Configuration
Organizations menu.
N4 does not allow you to add duplicate records where the Contact ID and the Address Type are same.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
94
Part 3: Cargo Management
Delivery Orders view
Delivery Order Inspector
3. Enter the other optional contact details.
If available, N4 automatically fills in the available information for the selected Contact ID. You can then edit these
fields according to your requirements.
4. Click Save.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
95
3.3 Cargo Lots view
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
A cargo lot represents non-containerized cargo, such as break-bulk cargo, rolling cargo, and bulk cargo. N4 enables
you to view and track non-containerized cargo and perform actions, such as stuff and strip cargo, manifest cargo, and
load and discharge cargo from a carrier.
Prerequisites
• Viewing cargo lot information in N4 requires the Bills of Lading Option.
• Cargo Lot - View privilege.
N4 uses cargo lots to track cargo in three basic ways:
• Bulk Cargo: Cargo is tracked by weight or volume, such as coal, wheat, and crude oil.
• Quantified Cargo: Cargo is tracked by quantity. This is sometimes referred to as Pseudo Bulk Cargo. In this case,
each piece of cargo does not have a unique identifier either because the identifier is unknown or because the pieces
are too numerous and interchangeable; therefore, this type of cargo is tracked only by quantity.
• Identified Cargo: Each piece of cargo is tracked by a known and unique identifier, such as the VIN number of a car.
For Bulk Cargo and Quantified Cargo, N4 creates:
One cargo lot and one unit per location
For bulk and quantified cargo, N4 maintains a cargo lot for each pile of a BL item at a unique location and each
cargo lot has an associated unit in the Units view. For example, consider a scenario where a BL item with 15 crates
arrives on a vessel. As the cargo is unloaded from the vessel, at some point you have:
• Three crates remaining onboard the vessel on Deck A.
• Two crates remaining onboard the vessel on Deck B.
• Four crates in the warehouse A at position A-12.
• One crate in the warehouse A at position A-23.
• Five crate on a truck that already left the yard.
N4 creates five cargo lots, one for each pile of the BL item at a unique location, and five corresponding units. If you
now discharge two of the three crates on the vessel on Deck A to position A-23 in the warehouse A, N4:
• Decreases the quantity of the cargo lot on Deck A by 2.
• Increases the quantity of the cargo lot at position A-23 by 2.
• Does not create any new cargo lots or units.
However, if you discharged the two crates on the vessel on Deck A to position A-34 in the warehouse A, N4 would:
• Decrease the quantity of the cargo lot on Deck A by 2.
• Create a new cargo lot for position A-34 with Quantity = 2.
• Create a corresponding new unit in the Units view.
For Identified Cargo, N4 creates:
One cargo lot and one unit per piece
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
96
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Delivery Order Inspector
For identified cargo, N4 maintains a cargo lot and a corresponding unit for each piece. For example, if you have a BL
item for identified cargo and Quantity = 15, N4 creates 15 cargo lots and 15 units for the BL item.
The Cargo Lots view displays the cargo lot records that fall within the Horizon (days) specified for the user. N4
compares the Created Date for a cargo lot with the Horizon (days) (User Preferences form) value to determine the
oldest record displayed in this view.
You can prevent the users logged in at one facility from viewing the cargo lots for the other facilities within the complex,
by including the CARGO_LOT_DENY_UNFILTERED_VIEW privilege in a role assigned to them and creating a saved
filter that is based on the Inbound BL Item Vessel Visit Facility (Ves. Facility) field in the Cargo Lots view. For more
information, see How do I prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing cargo lots for another facility in the
complex? (on page 183)
The Cargo Lots view displays only the cargo lots with non-zero quantities. To view the cargo lots where
Quantity = 0, use the Bill of Lading form (on page 62) Items tab (on page 66) of the associated BL.
From this view, you cannot add or delete a cargo lot. However, you can double-click a record to access the Cargo Lot
Inspector (on page 101) and view details of an existing cargo lot, edit some of the fields associated with the cargo lot,
and perform various actions related to cargo lots.
You can use the Actions menu to:
• Edit Cargo Lot (on page 115): Edit some of the fields associated with the selected cargo lot record.
• Stuff (on page 115): Stuff the selected cargo lot(s) into a container.
• Strip (on page 118): Strip the contents of a container to a yard position.
• Move (on page 120): Move the selected cargo lot(s) to a new position.
• Create Delivery Order (on page 121): Create a delivery order for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Create Service Order (on page 121): Create a service order to plan the events for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Record Service Event (on page 105): Record a service event for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Unload
Unload Vessel (on page 123): Unload cargo from a vessel to a yard position.
• Unload
Unload Truck (on page 124): Unload cargo from a truck to a yard position.
• Unload
Unload Rail (on page 125): Unload cargo from a train or a railcar to a yard position.
• Load
Load Vessel (on page 126): Load cargo from the yard to the specified vessel visit.
• Load
Load Truck (on page 127): Load cargo from the yard to the specified truck visit.
• Load
Load Rail (on page 129): Load cargo from the yard to the specified train visit.
• Manifest
Manifest Container (on page 131): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a container.
• Manifest
Manifest Vessel (on page 132): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel.
• Manifest
Manifest Rail (on page 134): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a rail.
• Other
Manufacture Cargo (on page 135): Create cargo lots for cargo manufactured at the facility.
• Other
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity (on page 136): Adjust the quantity of the selected cargo lot.
N4 records the adjustment as a discrepancy against the selected cargo lot record.
• Other
Transload (on page 137): Transload the selected cargo lot(s) to another container.
• Other
Identify Lot (on page 138): Identify the contents of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Other
Cancel Manifest (on page 139): Cancel the manifest for the selected cargo lot(s).
• Other Split BL (on page 140): Split the bill of lading associated with the selected cargo lot into smaller BLs for
ease of processing.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
97
Part 3: Cargo Management
• Other
Cargo Lots view
Delivery Order Inspector
Re-consign BL (on page 141): Re-consign the selected cargo lots to a new or existing BL.
• Record Damages (on page 142): Record damages for the selected cargo lot.
In the Cargo Lots view, if you press CTRL+s keys, N4 displays the Select Action message box where you can type
the first few characters of the action that you want to perform to access the option.
For example, if you want to record damages for the selected cargo lot, you can either click Actions Record
Damages option to access the Damages form (on page 142) or you can press CTRL+s keys and in the Select Action
message box, type Rec and select the Record Damage option from the list to access the Damages form.
The Cargo Lots view displays the information about the related break-bulk unit, such as the Unit Nbr, Position, and
T-state. The Position and T-state information is derived from the current Active unit facility visit (UFV). If the current
UFV is in the Advised state, it does not have an Active UFV, therefore, the related information is not displayed in the
Cargo Lots view.
In This Section
Cargo Lot ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cargo Lots Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cargo Lot Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Edit Cargo Lot form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cargo Stuff form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cargo Strip form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cargo Move form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Create Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Create Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cargo Discharge form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cargo De-Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cargo De-Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cargo Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cargo Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Cargo Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Manifest Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Manufacture Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cargo Transload form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cargo Identify form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cargo Split BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cargo Re-consign BL from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Damages form (Cargo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
98
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot ID
Cargo Lot ID
A Cargo Lot ID not only identifies the cargo lot but is also used as the Unit Nbr for the break-bulk unit associated with
the cargo lot. Since the unit numbers must be unique, N4 uses the following logic to generate a cargo lot ID and to
ensure that the cargo lot IDs are unique throughout N4:
The Cargo Lot ID consists of the following parts separated by dashes:
• The first part is the Bill of Lading Generated ID (BL GID).
In earlier versions of N4 the BL Number was used to generate the Cargo Lot ID. However, since the BL Numbers
may not always be unique, N4 now uses the auto-generated BL GID.
The BL GID is 8 digits long, where the first digit is a number that increments from 1 through 9 (after which it resets
to 1) and the next seven digits are generated from the Bill of Lading GKey (1 through 9,999,999).
If the GKey is less than seven digits, N4 prefixes the number with zeros.
For example, if the GKey of the BL is 1234, N4 adds zeros to make it 0001234. If the first digit is 1, the entire GID is
10001234 (1+0001234).
• The second part is the BL Item Sequence Number (only numeric, from 1 through infinity).
• The third part is the Cargo Lot Sequence Number (only numeric, from 0 (for the default cargo lot) through infinity).
For example, if the BL GID is 10001234 and the BL Item Sequence Number is 3, the Cargo Lot ID for the default
cargo lot is 10001234-3-0.
N4 displays the BL GID field in the Bills of Lading view (on page 59), Bill of Lading form (on page 62) (edit mode),
Cargo Lots view (on page 96), and the Details area in the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74).
Cargo Lots Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Group?
BL Category
Inbound BL
Item BL
Category
X
X
02-Order
BL GID
Inbound BL
Item BL
Generated
X
X
02-Order
BL Nbr
Inbound BL
Item BL
Number
X
X
02-Order
Brand
Brand
X
X
01-Cargo
Cargo Lot Id
Cargo Lot Id
X
X
01-Cargo
Category
Category
X
X
03-Unit
Changed
Record
Changed Date
X
X
01-Cargo
Changer
Record
Changed User
X
X
01-Cargo
Color
Color
X
X
01-Cargo
Commodity
Inbound BL
Item
Commodity
X
X
02-Order
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
99
Part 3: Cargo Management
Short Label
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lots Columns
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Group?
Consignee
Inbound BL
X
Item Consignee
X
02-Order
Created
Record Create
Date
X
X
01-Cargo
Creator
Record Create
User
X
X
01-Cargo
Cust. Ord. Nbr.
Inbound BL
Item Customer
Order Number
X
X
02-Order
Damage
Severity
Lot Damage
Severity
X
X
01-Cargo
Default
Default Lot
X
X
01-Cargo
Delivery Order
Delivery Order
X
X
02-Order
Dest
Inbound BL
Item
Destination
X
X
02-Order
Discrepancy
Discrepancy
X
X
01-Cargo
Item Nbr
Inbound BL
Item Number
X
X
02-Order
Line Op
Inbound BL
Item Line
Operator
X
X
02-Order
Lot Planned
Position
Lot Planned
Position
X
X
01-Cargo
Lot Position
Lot Position
X
X
01-Cargo
Lot Total
Weight (kg)
Lot Total
Weight (kg)
X
X
01-Cargo
Lot Type
Lot Position
Type
X
X
01-Cargo
LotGkey
LotGkey
X
X
01-Cargo
Manifested
Quantity
Manifested
X
X
01-Cargo
Marks
Inbound BL
X
Item Marks and
Numbers
X
02-Order
Model
Model
X
X
01-Cargo
Origin
Inbound BL
Item Origin
X
X
02-Order
Package Height Inbound BL
(cm)
Item Package
Height (cm)
X
X
02-Order
Package
Length (cm)
X
X
02-Order
Inbound BL
Item Package
Length (cm)
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
100
Part 3: Cargo Management
Short Label
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Group?
Package
Weight (kg)
Inbound BL
Item Package
Weight (kg)
X
X
02-Order
POD-1
Inbound BL
Item Port of
Discharge
X
X
02-Order
POD-2
Inbound BL
Item Second
Port of
Discharge
X
X
02-Order
POL
Inbound BL
Item Port of
Load
X
X
02-Order
Position
Position
X
X
03-Unit
Product
Inbound BL
Item Product
X
X
02-Order
Qty
Quantity
X
X
01-Cargo
Seq
Seq Number
X
X
01-Cargo
Shipper
Inbound BL
Item Shipper
X
X
02-Order
T-State
Transit State
X
X
03-Unit
Total Weight
(kg)
Inbound BL
Item Total
Weight (kg)
X
X
02-Order
Unit Nbr
Unit Nbr
X
X
03-Unit
Ves. Facility
Inbound BL
Item Vessel
Visit Facility
X
X
04-Routing
Ves. Visit
Inbound BL
Item Vessel
Visit Ref
X
X
04-Routing
The Delivery Order field is a part of the variform definition of the Cargo Lots view (on page 96) but is not visible
by default. You have to create a database-backed variform to display this field to your users. For more
information on creating a database-backed variform override: see Database Backed Variforms view in the
Navis N4 Administration Mode manual.
3.3.1 Cargo Lot Inspector
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
The Cargo Lot Inspector displays the details of the selected cargo lot and enables you to perform various actions on
it. The Cargo Lot Inspector provides a view of all the aspects of the selected cargo lot from the perspective of the
facility in the current scope. You can keep the Cargo Lot Inspector open at all times as you work in other views and
forms, and you can move and resize it as needed.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
101
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
To access the Cargo Lot Inspector double-click a record in the list view or select a record in the list view, right-click,
and select the Inspect Cargo Lot option.
N4 displays the basic information for a cargo lot in the following areas:
• Cargo Lot: Displays the icon associated with the cargo lot, the cargo lot ID, Unit Nbr (for a manifested cargo lot) BL
Nbr, Commodity, Product, Packaging, Quantity, and the Lot Total Weight.
The cargo lot displays the Unit information, such as the Unit Nbr, Position, and T-state for the current Active Unit
Facility Visit (UFV) associated with the cargo lot. If the current unit associated with the cargo lot is in the Advised
state, N4 displays these fields as null.
• Details: Displays the BL details, such as the BL Category, Shipper, Origin, POL, Consignee, Destination, and Item
Nbr, related to the cargo lot.
• Status: Displays cargo lot information, such as the Transit State, whether the cargo lot is the Default cargo lot,
whether any damages are associated with the cargo lot, any Discrepancy, Position, and date and time you created
or last updated the cargo lot record.
N4 allows you to associate an icon with the commodity (on page 18), package type (on page 29), and the product type
(on page 31) entities. The precedence of the icon displayed in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101), Bill of Lading
Inspector (on page 74), and the Unit Inspector is as follows:
• Package Type
• Product Type
• Commodity
• Standard Navis Cubes icon
The Details pane (on page 104) displays additional cargo lot information below the
button.
To display the Details pane:
1. Click
.
2. From the list on the left, select the type of information to display.
To perform actions:
1. Click Actions to display the menu.
2. Select the required menu option.
To view the list of actions that you can perform on a cargo lot, see the Cargo Lots view (on page 96).
Cargo Lot Inspector Columns
The following tables list the columns on the various tabs in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
Damages Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Changed
X
Changer
X
Created
X
Creator
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
102
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Damage
Damage Type
X
Description
Damage Description
X
Quantity
Damage Quantity
X
Repaired
Damage Repaired
X
Reported
Damage Reported
X
Severity
Damage Severity
X
History, Event Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Billable
Billable Event
X
Changes
Changes
X
Complex
Complex
X
Description
Description
X
Edi Batch Nbr
EDI Batch Number
X
Event ID
Event Type ID
X
Extract Batch
Billing Extract Batch Id
X
Facility
Facility
X
Notes
X
Operator
X
Order Nbr
X
Qty
Quantity
X
Qty Unit
Quantity Unit
X
Recorder
Recorder
X
Related Entity Class
X
Related Entity Id
X
Responsible Party
Responsible Party
X
Target
Target Entity
X
Time
X
Yard
Yard
X
Holds/Perms Tab
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Appl By
Applied By
X
Appl To
Applied To
X
Appl To Enty
Applied To Entity
X
Applied On
Applied On
X
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
103
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Short Label
Long Label
Sorting?
Description
Description
X
Guarded By
Guarded By
X
Guarded By Enty
Guarded By Entity
X
Hold/Perm
Hold/Permission
X
Hold/Perm View
Hold/Perm View
X
Note
Note
X
Ref ID
Reference ID
X
Ref Required
Reference Id Required
X
Rule Type
Rule Type
X
Status
X
Type
X
Unique Ref
Has Unique Reference Id
X
Upd By
Updated By
X
Upd Note
Update Note
X
Upd On
Updated On
X
Upd Ref ID
X
3.3.1.1 Details pane in the Cargo Lot Inspector
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
The Details pane in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) displays additional cargo lot information in the following
tabs:
• Damages (on page 105): Displays the damages recorded for the selected cargo lot.
• History, Events (on page 105): Displays the events recorded for the selected cargo lot.
You can add new events or view details of existing events on this tab.
• Holds/Perms (on page 106): Displays holds/permissions, if any, for the selected cargo lot.
You can add new holds/permissions, show details, grant permissions, and release holds on this tab.
The Holds/Perms tab displays the holds/permission associated with the cargo unit or the container unit and not the
cargo lot, itself. For example, if the cargo lot is in a container unit, the Holds/Perms tab in the Cargo Lot Inspector
displays all the holds/permissions associated with the container unit. For more information, see Cargo Holds/
Permissions (on page 108).
If you move a cargo lot that has a hold/permission associated with it to a location that does not have any holds/
permissions, N4 moves the holds/permissions to the new location and applies the holds/permissions to any cargo
lots already existing at the new location. If the new location already has holds/permissions, N4 merges the holds/
permissions of the existing and the new location.
• Units: Displays the units associated with the selected cargo lot.
When you double-click a unit in the tab, N4 displays the Unit Inspector for the selected unit. N4 does not display
this tab for the cargo lots that do not have a unit associated with them.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
104
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Damages tab
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Damages tab
The Damages tab displays the damages recorded for the selected cargo lot. From this tab, you can only view the
damages for the selected cargo lot.
To add, edit, or delete damages, use the Record Damages (on page 142) action from the Cargo Lots view (on page
96) or Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
History, Events tab
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
History, Events tab
The History, Events tab in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) displays the events recorded for the selected
cargo lot. The Changes field displays the values that changed per the event for the selected cargo lot.
Although N4 allows you to add event types for the cargo lot entity, they are available only for audit purposes and
are not supported with any other feature except to view them in the History, Events tab in the Cargo Lot
Inspector.
N4 displays the following events in the History, Events tab of the selected cargo lot:
• Event types where the Applies To field is set as Cargo Lot and the Functional Area may or may not be set as
Applicable to Cargo module.
These events are also listed in the History, Events tab of the Unit Inspector of the break-bulk unit associated with
the cargo lot.
• Event types where the Applies To field is set as Unit and the Functional Area is set as Applicable to Cargo
module.
To record an event for a cargo lot manually, use the Record Service Event form (on page 105).
To view the details of an event, double-click the event or use the Action
Show Details option.
Record Service Event form (Cargo Lot)
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Record Service Event
Record Service Event form
Operations
form
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Actions
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
History, Events tab
Record Service Event
Record Service Event
Record Service Event form
The Description and Billable Event fields in this form are read-only. N4 uses these fields to provide a short
description of the event and indicate whether the event is billable to the customer.
The Field Updates area in this form displays any fields that require user input. The fields displayed in this area depend
on the effects defined for the selected event. For more information, see Effects tab.
To record a service event:
1. From the Event Type ID drop-down list, select the service event that you want to record for the selected entity.
The drop-down list displays only the service event types defined at the current scope level that apply to the selected
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
105
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
target entity and for which you have the required privilege. For more information on adding a service event type, see
Event Type form.
2. Optionally, select the Service Order Number associated with the event.
The Service Order Number drop-down list displays only the service orders that have either the In Progress or the
New status. It does not display a service order if the status is either Completed or Cancelled.
When you record an event with a service order number, N4 updates the service order item status to Completed. For
more information, see Service Order Inspector Units tab.
N4 extracts the selected service order number to the Service Order field in the Chargeable Unit Events view for
the event.
3. From the Responsible Party lookup field, select the party responsible. If N4 automatically fills in the Responsible
Party field using the value specified in the Billing Party field in the Service Order form, the value cannot be edited.
N4 extracts this value to the Payee Id field in the Chargeable Unit Events view for the event.
4. Optionally, record the Quantity and Quantity Unit associated with the selected event type.
For example, if you have an event that records power supplied for reefers, you can enter a value in the Quantity
field and select the unit of time (days or hours) in the Quantity Unit field.
5. Optionally, in the Note field, enter any notes for the service event.
6. Optionally, in the Apply Date field, enter the date when the event is performed.
By default, N4 displays the current system date in this field.
7. Click OK.
N4 displays the recorded service event for the selected entity on the History, Event tab.
If the selected service event type is bulk-applicable, but a validation prevents you from recording it for one or more of
the selected items, N4 does not record the service event for any of the selected items.
In addition, if N4 is configured to automatically update a field, add/release a hold, or grant/cancel a permission, per a
service event type effect or auto update rule, N4 attempts to perform these tasks. If the change is unsuccessful, N4
displays an error message. But for an auto update rule, if any of the following are true then N4 does nothing:
• To release a hold when the hold is not active for the target entity.
To cancel a permission when the permission is not granted for the target entity (permission will still be required).
Holds/Perms tab
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Holds/Perms tab
The Holds/Perms tab displays the holds/permissions for the selected cargo lot. You can add a hold for the selected
cargo lot on this tab.
In addition, you can use the following Actions menu options to:
• Show Details: View the details of the selected hold/permission and the list of events affected by it.
You can also double-click a hold/permission to view the details and the list of events affected by it.
• Grant Permission (on page 82): Grant the selected permission.
You can only grant REQUIRED permissions.
• Release Hold: Release the selected hold.
You can only release ACTIVE holds.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
106
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
• Cancel Permission: Cancel the selected permission.
You can only cancel GRANTED permissions.
The Holds/Perms tab also displays the prerequisite events associated with the selected cargo lot. A prerequisite event
has the PRE_REQUISITE status. Use the Actions Show Details option to view the details of the prerequisite event
and the list of events affected by it.
You must record the prerequisite service event for the selected entity before you can record the service events listed
on the Affected Event Types tab.
To record a prerequisite service event, on the History, Events tab (on page 105) for the selected cargo lot, click
use the Actions Record Service Event (on page 105) option.
or
Update Hold/Permission form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Holds/Perms tab
Update Hold/Permission form
The Update Hold/Permission form enables you to add/release holds, or grant/cancel permissions for the selected
cargo lots.
Prerequisites
• In this form, you can select a hold/permission in step 2 only if it exists at the current scope level and has a service
business rule defined. For more information, see Holds/Permissions view.
To update a Hold/Permission:
1. From the Action drop-down list, select one of the following options:
▪ Add Hold: Add a hold for the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Release Hold: Release an ACTIVE hold for the cargo lot(s).
▪ Grant Permission: Grant a REQUIRED permission for the cargo lot(s).
▪ Cancel Permission: Cancel a GRANTED permission for the cargo lot(s).
2. From the Hold/Permission drop-down list, select the hold that you want to add/release or the permission that you
want to grant/cancel.
The Description and Target Entity Type fields are view-only and display information about the selected hold/
permission.
3. From the Relation to Referenced Guardian drop-down list, select the guardian entity type for the selected hold/
permission.
For a list of target entities and the related guardian entity types, see Target and guardian entity types.
4. From the Referenced Guardian Entity drop-down list, select the specific guardian entity for the hold/permission.
The values in the drop-down list depend on the option selected in step 3.
The Relation to Referenced Guardian and Referenced Guardian Entity drop-down list are enabled only
for guarded holds/permissions. For more information, see Rule types.
The Has Unique Reference Id and Reference Id Required check boxes are read-only and display the options set
at the time the hold/permission was defined. For more information, see Hold/Permission Type form.
5. If the Reference Id Required check box is selected, you must enter a reference ID in the Reference ID field, and if
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
107
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
the Has Unique Reference Id check box is selected, the reference ID entered in the Reference ID field must be
unique for the entity and hold/permission combination.
To change the reference ID for an existing hold/permission, you must release/cancel the hold/permission and
read the hold/permission with the new reference ID.
6. Optionally, in the Note field, enter a note for any special considerations for the hold/permission.
7. Click OK.
When updating a hold/permission:
• If you select multiple cargo lots in a list view and a validation prevents you from applying the hold/permission to one
or more selected cargo lot(s), N4 still applies the hold/permission to the other selected cargo lot(s).
• If the selected hold/permission already exists as an ACTIVE hold or a REQUIRED permission for a selected cargo
lot(s), N4 does not apply the same hold/permission twice.
• If a hold/permission that requires a unique reference ID already exists as an ACTIVE hold or a REQUIRED
permission for a selected cargo lot(s), N4 does not apply the same hold/permission twice if the reference ID that you
specify is the same as the reference ID that already exists.
Cargo Holds/Permissions
N4 persists holds/permissions for a cargo lot when you perform move actions, such as load and unload, or when you
stuff and strip cargo lots to and from containers. When you stuff cargo with holds/permissions into a container with no
holds/permissions, N4 retains the cargo holds/permissions. When you strip cargo with holds/permissions, N4 saves the
holds/permissions with the new cargo lot.
As most of the cargo Actions record events against the associated cargo unit, you must create the Holds/
Permissions for the Unit entity and not the Cargo Lot entity.
The following table list the various cargo-related events and the entity for which the event is recorded.
From Location
To Location
Entity
Event Recorded
Null
Yard
Unit
CARGO_MANUFA
CTURE
Vessel
Yard
Unit
CARGO_DISCH
Train
Yard
Unit
CARGO_DERAMP
Truck
Yard
Unit
CARGO_RECEIV
E
Container
Yard
Unit
CARGO_STRIP
Yard
Yard
Unit
CARGO_MOVE
Yard
Vessel
Unit
CARGO_LOAD
Yard
Train
Unit
CARGO_RAMP
Yard
Truck
Unit
CARGO_DELIVER
Yard
Container
Unit
CARGO_STUFF
Container
Container
Unit
CARGO_TRANSL
OAD
Cargo Lot
DISCREPANCY_N
OTED
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
108
Part 3: Cargo Management
From Location
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
To Location
Entity
Event Recorded
Cargo Lot
CARGO_POSITIO
N_UPDATED
(Recorded for the
Cargo Inventory
(on page 149)
actions)
Cargo Lot
CARGO_SPLIT
Cargo Lot
CARGO_SPLIT_O
FF
Cargo Lot
CARGO_RECONS
IGN
Cargo Lot
CARGO_RECONS
IGN_OFF
You can use the History, Events tab in the Unit Inspector of the unit associated with a cargo lot to view the events
recorded for the Unit entity. You can use the History, Events tab in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) to view the
events recorded for the Cargo Lot entity.
Transferring Cargo Holds/Permissions
The following table displays the various scenarios where a cargo lot is moved entirely or partially to a new location and
how the holds/permissions associated with the cargo lot are transferred.
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Non-containerized
Non-containerized
Partial
N/A
• Creates a new
cargo lot and
unit at the new
location.
• Applies the
holds/
permissions
from the source
to the target
unit.
Non-containerized
Non-containerized
Partial
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Target Cargo
Lot
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
109
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Non-containerized
Non-containerized
Full
N/A
• Moves the Unit
at the source
location to the
target location.
• No changes to
the Holds/
Permissions.
Non-containerized
Non-containerized
Full
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Non-containerized
Containerized
Partial
N/A
• Creates a new
cargo lot and
unit at the new
location.
• Applies the
holds/
permissions
from the source
to the target
unit.
Non-containerized
Containerized
Partial
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Target Cargo
Lot
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
110
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Non-containerized
Containerized
Full
Target Cargo
Lot
N/A
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
• Moves the
cargo lot to the
container at the
target location.
• Retires the unit
at the source
location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Non-containerized
Containerized
Full
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Retires the unit
at the source
location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Containerized
Containerized
Partial
N/A
• Creates a new
cargo lot in the
container at the
new location.
• Applies the
holds/
permissions
from the source
to the target
unit.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
111
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Containerized
Containerized
Partial
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
Containerized
Containerized
Full
N/A
• Creates a new
cargo lot in the
container at the
new location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
• Does not delete
the Holds/
Permissions
from the source
unit even if the
container is
empty.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Target Cargo
Lot
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
112
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Containerized
Containerized
Full
Target Cargo
Lot
Exists
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location with the
Holds/
Permissions of
the target
location.
• Does not delete
the Holds/
Permissions
from the source
unit even if the
container is
empty.
Containerized
Non-containerized
Partial
N/A
• Creates a new
cargo lot and BBulk unit at the
new location.
• Applies the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location to the
B-Bulk unit at
the new
location.
Containerized
Non-containerized
Partial
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the
container unit to
the B-Bulk unit
at the new
location.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
113
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Source Location
Type
Target Location
Type
Move Quantity
Containerized
Non-containerized
Full
Target Cargo
Lot
N/A
How N4 handles
the Holds/
Permissions
• Creates a new
cargo lot and BBulk unit at the
new location.
• Applies the
Holds/
Permissions
from the source
location to the
B-Bulk unit at
the new
location.
• Does not delete
the Holds/
Permissions
from the source
unit even if the
container is
empty.
Containerized
Non-containerized
Full
Exists
• Increases the
Quantity at the
target location.
• Merges the
Holds/
Permissions
from the
container unit to
the B-Bulk unit
at the new
location.
• Does not delete
the Holds/
Permissions
from the source
unit even if the
container is
empty.
Units tab
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Units tab
The Units tab displays the units associated with the selected cargo lot. You cannot add, edit, or delete units from this
tab.
If you double-click a unit record, N4 displays the Unit Inspector for the selected unit. However, N4 does not display
this tab for cargo lots that do not have a unit associated with them.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
114
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Edit Cargo Lot form
3.3.2 Edit Cargo Lot form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Edit Cargo Lot
Edit Cargo Lot form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
The Edit Cargo Lot form enables you to edit some of the fields associated with a cargo lot. If you select multiple
records in the list view, the Actions Edit Cargo Lot option is not available.
You can edit the following fields for the selected cargo lot:
• Quantity Manifested
• Lot Total Weight
• Brand
• Model
• Color
• Export Release Nbr
• Lot Planned Position
N4 displays the above fields in the Status area in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101). When you update the cargo
lot details to the Edit Cargo Lot form, N4 records the CARGO_PROPERTY_UPDATE event in the History, Events
tab of the Unit Inspector and the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
3.3.3 Cargo Stuff form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Stuff
Cargo Stuff form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can stuff cargo units in the yard into a unit in the yard. You can use the Cargo Stuff form to stuff the
selected cargo units into the specified container. You can stuff multiple cargo items from different yard locations or from
a truck into a container. The cargo lots may be associated with the same or different bills of lading.
Prerequisites for stuffing a cargo lot into an empty storage unit.
• A vessel visit in the Working phase.
• An Export bill of lading (on page 59).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
115
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Stuff form
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo unit in the yard (a B-Bulk unit must exist in the Units view for the cargo lot).
To stuff a cargo unit into an empty storage unit:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to stuff into a unit.
The cargo lot must have a cargo unit associated with it and the position of the cargo unit can be in the yard or truck.
You cannot select a default cargo lot to perform the stuff action.
2. Select Actions
Stuff.
3. In the Cargo Stuff form:
a. Optionally, in the Service Order Nbr field, enter the ID of the service order for the stuff action.
The specified service order must exist in N4. To add a new service order, use the Actions
Order (on page 121) option.
Create Service
b. In the Container field, enter the Unit Nbr of the unit into which you want to stuff the selected cargo lot(s).
If the commodity associated with the cargo lot has temperature requirements, you can stuff the selected
cargo lot only into a reefer container.
a. In the Quantity field, edit the prompted value if you do not want to stuff the entire cargo lot quantity in the unit.
If you select multiple cargo lots in the list view, N4 does not display the Quantity field. The entire quantity of
all the selected cargo lots is stuffed into the selected container.
a. Select the Direct Stuff check box to perform a stuff operation directly from a truck into a container.
b. Select the Truck Complete check box to move the truck to the next stage after the stuff operation.
c. Click Save.
When you successfully stuff the entire quantity of a cargo lot into the specified container, N4:
• In the Units view:
▪ Retires the B-Bulk unit and sets the Cargo Quantity = 0.
▪ Records the CARGO_STUFF event for the B-Bulk unit.
You can use the Unit Inspector History, Events tab or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101)
Events tab to view the details of the event.
History,
▪ If the Freight Kind of the selected container unit is Empty, N4 retires the unit and creates a new unit with Freight
Kind = FCL.
If you select multiple cargo lots in the Cargo Lots view and the cargo lots are associated with multiple
bills of lading, the Freight Kind of the new unit is LCL. If the selected cargo lots are associated with the
same bill of lading, the Freight Kind of the new unit is FCL.
▪ If the Freight Kind of the selected unit is FCL or LCL, N4 does not retire the unit.
▪ Adds the cargo lot Quantity to the Cargo Quantity of the container unit.
▪ Records the UNIT_STUFF event for the container unit.
For the Cargo Stuff action, N4 records a CARGO_STUFF event each time you stuff a partial or full quantity
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
116
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Stuff form
to a unit. However, it records the UNIT_STUFF action only once when you stuff the first cargo lot into the
unit.
• In the Cargo Lots view:
▪ Sets the Lot Type of the cargo lot as Container.
▪ Associates the new unit with the cargo lot in the Unit Nbr field.
▪ Updates the position of the cargo lot to match the Position of the new FCL container in the Yard.
▪ If you specified a service order in the Cargo Stuff form, N4 also updates the status of the service order after
successfully completing the stuff action.
Holds/Permissions for Strip and Stuff actions
N4 provides a Groovy hook with the Strip and Stuff actions for a cargo lot to enable you to control which holds/
permission are transferred as part of the operation.
The following code sample represents the Groovy plug-in that you can edit to specify which holds/permission are
transferred as part of the Strip and Stuff actions. This example transfers the CARGO_UNLOAD hold as part of the
Strip or Stuff action:
import java.util.ArrayList;
import java.util.Collection;
import java.util.List;
import com.navis.apex.business.model.GroovyInjectionBase;
import com.navis.cargo.business.model.CargoLot;
import com.navis.inventory.business.units.Unit;
import com.navis.services.business.rules.Flag;
import com.navis.services.business.rules.FlagType;
class CustomHoldTypeListForTransferGroovyImpl extends GroovyInjectionBase {
public List<String> getHoldTypeList(Unit inFromUnit, Unit inToUnit) {
List<String> returnHoldTypeIds = new ArrayList();
log("From Unit:"+inFromUnit.getUnitId()) ;
log("To Unit:"+inToUnit.getUnitId()) ;
Collection flags = FlagType.findActiveFlagsOnEntity(inFromUnit);
for (Object flagObj : flags) {
Flag flag = (Flag) flagObj;
//You can add the list of all holds/permissions that you want to
//move as part of the Strip and Stuff actions.
if (flag.getFlagFlagType().getId().equals("CARGO_UNLOAD")){
returnHoldTypeIds.add(flag.getFlagFlagType().getId()) ;
}
}
return returnHoldTypeIds;
}
}
If the selected cargo lot has other holds/permissions associated with it, N4 does not transfer those as part of the Strip
and Stuff actions. It transfers only the holds/permissions specified in the Groovy plug-in.
The Groovy class name and method signature must match exactly with that specified in the example above.
You can use this Groovy plug-in to transfer different holds for the Strip and the Stuff actions, if required. N4 uses the
inFromUnit and inToUnit variables to determine the Freight Kind of the units. If the inFromUnit represents a
containerized unit and inToUnit represents a break-bulk unit, then it is the Strip action. If the condition is reversed, it
is the Stuff action.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
117
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Strip form
3.3.4 Cargo Strip form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Strip
Cargo Strip form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
You can use the Cargo Strip form to strip cargo from a unit, either entirely or partially, and create break-bulk unit(s) in
the yard. You can also use service orders (on page 121) to create a plan for a container to be stripped. You can strip
multiple cargo lots from a single container or multiple containers.
Prerequisites for stripping cargo from a container:
• An Import bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A unit in the yard (Units view).
To strip cargo from a unit:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to strip from a unit.
The cargo lot must have a cargo unit associated with it and the position of the cargo unit must be in the yard. You
cannot select a default cargo lot to perform the strip action.
2. Select Actions
Strip.
3. In the Cargo Strip form:
a. Optionally, in the Service Order Nbr field, enter the ID of the service order for the strip action.
The specified service order must exist in N4. To add a new service order, use the Actions
Order (on page 121) option.
Create Service
b. In the Yard Position field, enter a valid yard position where the stripped cargo must be placed.
c. Select the Is Container Empty? check box if you are stripping the entire contents of the unit.
Do not select the check box, if you are only partially stripping the container. N4 displays an error if you select the
check box but enter a value in the Quantity field that is less than the available cargo lot quantity.
d. In the Quantity field, edit the prompted value if you do not want to strip the entire cargo lot quantity from the unit.
If you select multiple cargo lots in the list view, N4 does not display the Quantity field. The entire quantity of all
the selected cargo lots is stripped and placed at the specified yard location.
e. Click Save.
The following table displays the changes that occur as part of the strip action:
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
118
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Strip form
Partially strip
cargo to a new
yard location
Partially strip
cargo to an
existing yard
location
Strip all the
cargo to a new
yard location
Strip all the
cargo to an
existing yard
location
Creates a new BBulk unit
Yes
No
Yes
No
Creates a new
cargo lot record
in the Cargo
Lots view
Yes
No
No
No
Associates the
B-Bulk unit with
the cargo lot
Yes
N/A
Yes
N/A
Retires the
existing unit and
creates a new
STORAGE
Empty unit
No
No
Yes
Yes
Records the
UNIT_STRIP
event against
the Retired BBulk unit
No
No
Yes
Yes
In addition, when you successfully strip a cargo lot from the specified container to a location in the yard, N4:
• Updates the Cargo Quantity of the B-Bulk unit as follows:
Cargo Quantity = Cargo Quantity + Quantity
If you strip the entire Quantity from a cargo lot, N4 no longer displays the cargo lot in the Cargo Lots view.
You can view the cargo lot where Quantity = 0 only from the Cargo Lots tab (on page 70) in the Bill of
Lading Inspector (on page 74) of the associated BL.
• Records the CARGO_STRIP event for the B-Bulk unit.
For the B-Bulk unit, you can use the Unit Inspector History, Events tab or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page
101) History, Events tab to view the details of the event.
• Reduces the Quantity of the original cargo lot by the stripped quantity.
• Copies the Agent information from the bill of lading to the cargo lot.
• Copies the Deliver Order Number, if present, from the original cargo lot to the new cargo lot.
• Records the UNIT_STRIP event if all the cargo has been stripped from the unit.
For the B-Bulk unit, you can use the Unit Inspector
History, Events tab to view the details of the event.
For the Cargo Strip action, N4 records a CARGO_STRIP event each time you strip a partial or full quantity
from a unit. However, it records the UNIT_STRIP action only once after the entire cargo is stripped from the
unit.
If you specified a service order in the Cargo Strip form, N4 also updates the status of the service order after
successfully completing the strip action.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
119
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Move form
Holds/Permissions for Strip and Stuff actions
N4 provides a Groovy hook with the Strip and Stuff actions for a cargo lot to enable you to control which holds/
permission are transferred as part of the operation.
The following code sample represents the Groovy plug-in that you can edit to specify which holds/permission are
transferred as part of the Strip and Stuff actions. This example transfers the CARGO_UNLOAD hold as part of the
Strip or Stuff action:
import java.util.ArrayList;
import java.util.Collection;
import java.util.List;
import com.navis.apex.business.model.GroovyInjectionBase;
import com.navis.cargo.business.model.CargoLot;
import com.navis.inventory.business.units.Unit;
import com.navis.services.business.rules.Flag;
import com.navis.services.business.rules.FlagType;
class CustomHoldTypeListForTransferGroovyImpl extends GroovyInjectionBase {
public List<String> getHoldTypeList(Unit inFromUnit, Unit inToUnit) {
List<String> returnHoldTypeIds = new ArrayList();
log("From Unit:"+inFromUnit.getUnitId()) ;
log("To Unit:"+inToUnit.getUnitId()) ;
Collection flags = FlagType.findActiveFlagsOnEntity(inFromUnit);
for (Object flagObj : flags) {
Flag flag = (Flag) flagObj;
//You can add the list of all holds/permissions that you want to
//move as part of the Strip and Stuff actions.
if (flag.getFlagFlagType().getId().equals("CARGO_UNLOAD")){
returnHoldTypeIds.add(flag.getFlagFlagType().getId()) ;
}
}
return returnHoldTypeIds;
}
}
If the selected cargo lot has other holds/permissions associated with it, N4 does not transfer those as part of the Strip
and Stuff actions. It transfers only the holds/permissions specified in the Groovy plug-in.
The Groovy class name and method signature must match exactly with that specified in the example above.
You can use this Groovy plug-in to transfer different holds for the Strip and the Stuff actions, if required. N4 uses the
inFromUnit and inToUnit variables to determine the Freight Kind of the units. If the inFromUnit represents a
containerized unit and inToUnit represents a break-bulk unit, then it is the Strip action. If the condition is reversed, it
is the Stuff action.
3.3.5 Cargo Move form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Move
Cargo Move form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
120
Part 3: Cargo Management
Railcar Visits
Cargo Lots view
Create Delivery Order form
Railcar Visits view
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
You can use the Cargo Move form to move cargo lots from one position to another.
When you move a cargo lot, if the original cargo lot is associated with a delivery order, N4 copies the Delivery Order
Number to the new cargo lot.
3.3.6 Create Delivery Order form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Create Delivery Order
Create Delivery Order form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
You can use a deliver order to group together the cargo lots for the same consignee. The cargo lots included in a
delivery order may be associated with the same or different bills of lading. In the Cargo Lots view, you must select all
the cargo lots that you want to include in the new delivery order.
To add a delivery order for the selected cargo lot(s):
1. From the Billing Party lookup field, select the organization responsible for the payment of the delivery order.
2. Optionally, click Add Contact Details button to add the contact information for the delivery order.
For more information, see Contact Details form (on page 89).
3. Enter other optional information for the delivery order, such as the Carrier Mode, Customer Reference, and Notes.
4. Optionally, assign a PIN (on page 65), PIN (on page 88) to the new delivery order. You can enter up to 20
alphanumeric characters in this field.
You can view the PIN assigned to a delivery order in the Delivery Orders view (on page 85) and on the Details
area in the Delivery Order Inspector (on page 91). In addition, when you assign a PIN to a delivery order, N4
records the SERVICE_ORDER_PROPERTY_UPDATE event against the delivery order. You can view this event on
the History, Events tab of the Delivery Order Inspector for the delivery order.
5. Optionally, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field if the delivery order is not for the entire cargo lot quantity.
6. Click Save.
If successful, N4 adds a delivery order and an order item for each of the cargo lots selected in the list view.
3.3.7 Create Service Order form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Operations
form
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lots Inspector
Create Service Order
Actions
Create Service Order form
Create Service Order
Create Service Order
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
121
Part 3: Cargo Management
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Cargo Lots view
Create Service Order form
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can use a service order to plan the events to be performed on a cargo lot.
For example, you can create a service order to identify all the cargo lots that must be stuffed into a container. You can
use a service order to create a plan to stuff:
• An identified cargo lot into a container.
• A quantified cargo lot into a container.
• Multiple cargo lots partially into a container.
• A quantified cargo lot partially into a container.
To add a service order:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lots for which you want to plan the events.
2. From the Actions menu, select the Create Service Order option.
3. In the Create Service Order form:
a. In the Service Order Number field, enter the service order ID. If a service order already exists, N4 adds the
event type to the same order.
b. Optionally, in the Unit Nbr field, enter the ID of the container associated with the service order.
For example, if the service order is for stuffing cargo lots into a container, enter the Unit Nbr of that container in
this field.
c. From the Event Types lookup field, select the cargo event for which you are creating the service order.
If you specified an existing service order in step a above and a service order item for the selected event type
already exists, N4 updates the quantity for the service order item accordingly.
d. From the Billing Party lookup field, select the organization responsible for paying for the service order.
e. Optionally, in the End By Date field, enter the date and time by when the service order must be fulfilled.
f. Optionally, in the Notes field, enter any miscellaneous notes for the service order.
g. Click Save.
When successful, N4:
• Creates or updates the service order and associates it with the cargo lot(s).
You can view the Order Nbr in the Details area in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
• Lists the service order in the Operations
Yard
Service Orders
Service Orders view.
• Associates the selected Event Type with the service order.
You can use the Service Order Inspector
Services tab to view the details.
• Associates the specified unit with the service order.
You can use the Service Order Inspector
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Units tab to view the unit.
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
122
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Discharge form
3.3.8 Cargo Discharge form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Unload
Unload Vessel
Cargo Discharge form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can discharge cargo lots from a vessel to a valid yard position. You can select multiple cargo lots on the
vessel and discharge them to a single yard position.
Prerequisites for discharging a cargo lot from a vessel
• A vessel visit in the Working phase.
• An Import bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot on the vessel.
To discharge selected cargo lot(s) from a vessel:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to discharge from the vessel.
The selected cargo lot(s) must be on the same vessel visit; however, they can be at different positions on the vessel.
In addition, the selected cargo lot must not be a default cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Unload
Unload Vessel.
3. In the Cargo Discharge form:
a. Enter a valid Yard Position.
b. If you do not want to discharge the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that
you want to discharge to the specified yard position.
However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you selected multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you
selected an identified cargo lot.
c. Click Save.
When you successfully discharge a cargo lot from a vessel, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo Discharge form.
▪ Lot Type = Yard
▪ Lot Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo Discharge form.
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Yard
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
123
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo De-Van form
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo Discharge form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One UNIT_DISCH event.
▪ One CARGO_DISCH event for each of the selected cargo lots.
• Adds a STORAGE event to the Chargeable Unit Events view.
If you discharge a cargo lot partially, N4 records the CARGO_DISCH event but the Quantity and Quantity
Unit fields for the STORAGE event created in the Chargeable Unit Events view are null.
3.3.9 Cargo De-Van form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Unload
Unload Truck
Cargo De-Van form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can use the Cargo De-Van form to unload cargo lots from a truck to a valid yard position. You can only
select one cargo lot at a time to unload it from a truck.
Prerequisites for unloading a cargo lot from a truck
• An active truck visit must exist.
• A bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot on the truck.
To unload selected cargo lot from a truck:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot that you want to unload from the truck.
The selected cargo lot must be on the same truck visit. In addition, the selected cargo lot must not be a default
cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Unload
Unload Truck.
3. In the Cargo De-Van form:
a. Enter a valid Yard Position.
b. If you do not want to unload the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that
you want to unload to the specified yard position. However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you select an
identified cargo lot.
c. Click Save.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
124
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo De-Ramp form
When you successfully unload a cargo lot from a truck, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot.
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Van form.
▪ Lot Type = Yard
▪ Lot Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Van form.
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Yard
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Van form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot.
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One CARGO_RECEIVE event for each cargo lot.
▪ One UNIT_RECEIVE event.
3.3.10 Cargo De-Ramp form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Unload
Unload Rail
Cargo De-Ramp form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can unload cargo lots from a train or a railcar to a valid yard position. You can select multiple cargo lots on
the train and unload them to a single yard position.
Prerequisites for unloading a cargo lot from a railcar
• A train visit in the Working phase.
• An Import bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot on the train.
To unload selected cargo lot(s) from a railcar:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to unload from the railcar. The selected
cargo lot(s) must be on the same train visit; however, they can be at different positions on the train. In addition, the
selected cargo lot must not be a default cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Unload
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Unload Train.
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
125
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Load form
3. In the Cargo De-Ramp form:
a. Enter a valid Yard Position.
b. If you do not want to unload the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that
you want to unload to the specified yard position.
However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you select multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you select an
identified cargo lot.
c. Click Save.
When you successfully unload a cargo lot from a railcar, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Ramp form.
▪ Lot Type = Yard
▪ Lot Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Ramp form.
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Yard
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Cargo De-Ramp form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One CARGO_DERAMP event for each of the selected cargo lots.
▪ One UNIT_DERAMP event.
3.3.11 Cargo Load form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Load
Load Vessel
Cargo Load form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can load a cargo lot from a valid yard position to a vessel visit. N4 assigns a valid yard position and creates
a unit for a cargo lot when you perform any of the following actions:
• Receive the break-bulk unit through the gate.
• Unload a cargo lot from an inbound carrier.
• Identify the cargo lot.
• Manufacture cargo at the facility.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
126
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Van form
Prerequisites for loading a cargo lot to a vessel
• A vessel visit in the Working phase.
• An Export bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot with a valid yard position.
To load selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to load to the same position on a vessel.
The selected cargo lot must not be a default cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Load
Load Vessel.
3. In the Cargo Load form:
a. Select the Vessel Visit.
b. Enter a valid Vessel Position for the selected cargo lot(s).
c. If you do not want to load the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that you
want to load to the specified position.
However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you select multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you select an
identified cargo lot.
d. Click Save.
When you successfully load a cargo lot to a vessel, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Position = Vessel Position specified in the Cargo Load form.
▪ Lot Type = Vessel
▪ Lot Position = Vessel Position specified in the Cargo Load form.
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Loaded
▪ Position = Vessel Position specified in the Cargo Load form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One CARGO_LOAD event for each of the selected cargo lots.
▪ One UNIT_LOAD event.
3.3.12 Cargo Van form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Load
Load Truck
Cargo Van form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
127
Part 3: Cargo Management
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Van form
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can use the Cargo Van form to load a cargo lot from a valid yard position onto a truck. You can load cargo
lots from multiple yard locations or from a single yard location. N4 assigns a valid yard position and creates a unit for a
cargo lot when you perform any of the following actions:
• Receive the break-bulk unit through the gate.
• Unload a cargo lot from an inbound carrier.
• Identify the cargo lot.
• Manufacture cargo at the facility.
If you use the Cargo Van form to load a cargo lot, N4 does not create a gate transaction for the load. To
create a gate transaction and save all the details, you must configure and use the Deliver Break-Bulk Cargo
process for your site.
Prerequisites for loading a cargo lot onto a truck
• An active truck visit.
The truck visit must not be in the Complete state.
• A delivery order (on page 85) or a bill of lading (on page 59).
When you create a Deliver Break-Bulk (DB) gate transaction with only a delivery order and no bill of lading, N4 can
use the delivery order to identify the gate transactions associated with the truck visit and then check to see if the
delivery order has a BL that matches the BL of the cargo lot. If it finds a match, N4 uses that gate transaction to
complete the Truck Load action.
If you use delivery orders for Deliver Break-Bulk (DB) gate transactions, N4 updates the Order Status when the
truck visit and the associated gate transaction are completed. However, if the delivery order is created without cargo
lot details, the Order Status remains New. N4 updates the Order Status based on the Cargo Delivery Order Item
field. Therefore, in your gate configuration, you must include the Cargo Delivery Order Item field for the Deliver
Break-Bulk (DB) gate transaction at the ingate stage.
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot with a valid yard position.
To load selected cargo lot(s) on to a truck:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to load onto the truck. The selected cargo
lot must not be a default cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Load
Load Truck.
3. In the Cargo Van form:
a. Select the Truck Visit.
b. If you do not want to load the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that you
want to load onto the truck.
However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you select multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you select an
identified cargo lot.
c. Select the Truck Complete check box if you have loaded all the cargo lots onto the truck and want the truck to
proceed to the next gate stage.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
128
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Ramp form
d. Click Save.
N4 displays an error message if the cargo lot is already on the truck.
When you successfully load a cargo lot onto a truck, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Loaded
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One CARGO_DELIVER event for each of the selected cargo lots.
▪ One UNIT_DELIVER event.
3.3.13 Cargo Ramp form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Load
Load Rail
Cargo Ramp form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In N4, you can load a cargo lot from a valid yard position to a train visit. N4 assigns a valid yard position and creates a
unit for a cargo lot when you perform any of the following actions:
• Receive the break-bulk unit through the gate.
• Unload a cargo lot from an inbound carrier.
• Identify the cargo lot.
• Manufacture cargo at the facility.
Prerequisites for loading a cargo lot to a train
• A train visit in the Working phase.
• An Export bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A cargo lot with a valid yard position.
To load selected cargo lot(s) to a train:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) that you want to load to the same position on a train.
The selected cargo lot must not be a default cargo lot.
2. Select Actions
Load
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Load Rail.
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
129
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manifest Cargo
3. In the Cargo Ramp form:
a. Select the Train Visit.
b. Optionally, select the Railcar Visit where you want to load the cargo lot(s).
c. Optionally, enter a Position on the train visit for the selected cargo lot(s).
d. If you do not want to load the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity that you
want to load to the specified position.
However, N4 does not display the Quantity field if you select multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you select an
identified cargo lot.
e. Click Save.
When you successfully load a cargo lot to a train, N4:
• Creates one record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Position = Position specified in the Cargo Ramp form.
▪ Lot Type = Train
▪ Lot Position = Position specified in the Cargo Ramp form.
• Retires the existing unit in the Units view and creates a new unit with:
▪ T-state = Loaded
▪ Position = Position specified in the Cargo Ramp form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
• Records the following events against the Unit record:
▪ One CARGO_RAMP event for each of the selected cargo lots.
▪ One UNIT_RAMP event.
3.3.14 Manifest Cargo
You can manifest cargo to provide and update relevant information for inbound cargo, enabling N4 to efficiently and
accurately record the cargo details. When you manifest cargo accurately, you provide the terminal as much information
as possible prior to the arrival of the cargo. This reduces the time it takes to receive and process inbound cargo, thus
increasing the terminal capacity and throughput.
You can manifest cargo to a carrier, such as a vessel or a rail, or you can manifest cargo to a container. You can
manifest a cargo lot using the Actions menu from the:
• Cargo Lots view (on page 96)
• Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74)
• Unit Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form (on page 66)
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
• Vessel Inspector
Cargo Lots tab
• Train Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
• Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
In addition, you can manifest cargo lots using SNX. The <position> element, which is a child element of the <cargo-lot>
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
130
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manifest Cargo
element, represents the position of the cargo lot. N4 manifests the cargo lot based on the <cargo-lot> element and the
<position> element.
When you:
• Manifest Cargo to Container (on page 131): You indicate that the cargo lot is inside a container. In this case, N4
does not create a new unit, instead it associates the cargo lot with the existing unit ID. You can then strip the cargo
lot from the unit.
• Manifest Cargo to Vessel (on page 132): You associate the cargo lot with a vessel visit and indicate that the cargo
lot is on board a vessel at the specified position. In this case, N4 creates a new unit on board the vessel at the
specified position. You can then unload the unit from the vessel.
• Manifest Cargo to Rail (on page 134): You associate the cargo lot with a train visit (or a railcar visit) and indicate
that the cargo lot is on board a train at the specified position or railcar ID. In this case, N4 creates a new unit on
board the train. You can then unload the unit from the train.
3.3.14.1 Cargo Manifest To Container form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Manifest
Manifest Container
Operations Cargo/Unit Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view Bill of Lading form Items tab
Lots tab Actions Manifest Manifest Container Cargo Manifest To Container form
Cargo Manifest To Container form
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo On Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo On Board tab
You can use the Cargo Manifest To Container form to manifest selected cargo lot(s) to an Active or Advised
container unit. Manifesting a cargo lot to a container indicates that the cargo lot is inside the container. In this case, N4
does not create a new unit; instead, it associates the cargo lot with the existing unit ID. You can then perform other
cargo related actions, such as Strip (on page 118), on this unit.
Prerequisites for manifesting cargo lot(s) to a container
• A vessel visit in the Created, Inbound, Arrived, or Working phase.
• A bill of lading (on page 59) (BL).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A default cargo lot.
• An Active or Advised container unit that has the following attributes:
▪ Freight Kind is not Empty
▪ Category = BL Category
▪ Vessel Visit = Vessel Visit of the BL
▪ Line Op = Line Op of the BL
▪ POD = POD of the BL
▪ POL = POL of the BL
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
131
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manifest Cargo
To manifest selected cargo lot(s) to a container:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the default cargo lot(s) that you want to manifest to a container.
You can also use the paths specified for the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74), Bill of Lading form (on page
62), or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) at the top of this topic.
2. Select the Actions
Manifest
Manifest Container option.
3. In the Cargo Manifest To Container form:
a. Enter the Unit Nbr of the container where you want to manifest the cargo lot.
b. If you do not want to manifest the entire quantity, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field, accordingly.
For a default cargo lot, N4 allows you to enter a value that is greater than the value displayed in the Quantity
field. In this case, the default cargo lot Quantity is updated to a negative value after you successfully manifest
the cargo lot.
However, the Quantity field does not display for an Identified cargo lot. For more information on identifying a
cargo lot, see Identified Lots tab (on page 71).
c. Click Save.
If successful, N4:
• Creates a new cargo lot, where:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the container specified.
▪ Position = Position of the unit.
▪ Lot Position = Position of the unit.
▪ Category = Category of the unit.
▪ Qty = Quantity specified in the Cargo Manifest To Container form.
• Reduces the Quantity of the default cargo lot by the manifested Quantity above.
If the remaining Quantity for the default cargo lot is zero, the cargo lot is fully manifested and it no longer
displays in the Cargo Lots view.
• Does not create a new Break-Bulk unit. However, it updates the specified unit as follows:
▪ Updates the Cargo Quantity = Existing Cargo Quantity + Quantity.
▪ Displays the cargo lot in the Cargo Lots tab in the Unit Inspector.
3.3.14.2 Cargo Manifest To Vessel form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Manifest
Manifest Vessel
Operations Cargo/Unit Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view Bill of Lading form
Lots tab Actions Manifest Manifest Vessel Cargo Manifest To Vessel form
Cargo Manifest To Vessel form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo On Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo On Board tab
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
132
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manifest Cargo
You can use the Cargo Manifest to Vessel form to manifest selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel visit. Manifesting a cargo
lot to a vessel visit indicates that the cargo lot is on board the vessel. In this case, N4 creates a new Break-bulk unit
with the position on board the vessel. However, if there is already an existing cargo lot at the target position, N4 does
not create a new unit, it only adds the Quantity to the existing cargo lot and unit. You can then perform other cargo
related actions on the unit, such as unload it from the vessel (on page 123).
Prerequisites for manifesting cargo lot(s) to a vessel
• A vessel visit in the Created, Inbound, Arrived, or Working phase.
• A bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A default cargo lot.
To manifest selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the default cargo lot(s) that you want to manifest to a vessel.
You can also use the paths specified for the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74), Bill of Lading form (on page
62), or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) at the top of this topic.
2. Select the Actions
Manifest
Manifest Vessel option.
3. In the Cargo Manifest To Vessel form:
a. From the Vessel Visit Id field, select the vessel visit to which you want to manifest the cargo lot.
b. In the Vessel Slot field, enter the position on the vessel where you want to manifest the cargo lot. You can enter
a maximum of 16 characters.
c. If you do not want to manifest the entire quantity, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field, accordingly.
For a default cargo lot, N4 allows you to enter a value that is greater than the value displayed in the Quantity
field. In this case, the default cargo lot Quantity is updated to a negative value after you successfully manifest
the cargo lot.
However, the Quantity field does not display for an Identified cargo lot. For more information on identifying a
cargo lot, see Identified Lots tab (on page 71).
d. Click Save.
If successful, N4:
• Creates a new cargo lot, where:
▪ Position = Position on the vessel.
▪ Qty = Quantity specified in the Cargo Manifest To Vessel form.
• Reduces the Quantity of the default cargo lot by the manifested Quantity above.
If the remaining Quantity for the default cargo lot is zero, the cargo lot is fully manifested and it no longer
displays in the Cargo Lots view.
• Creates a new Break-Bulk unit in the Units view and:
▪ Sets the Cargo Quantity = Quantity specified in the Cargo Manifest To Vessel form.
▪ Sets the Position = Position on the vessel.
▪ Displays the cargo lot in the Cargo Lots tab in the Unit Inspector.
▪ Displays the cargo lots in the Cargo Lots tab in the Vessel Inspector.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
133
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manifest Cargo
3.3.14.3 Cargo Manifest To Rail form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Manifest
Manifest Rail
Operations Cargo/Unit Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view Bill of Lading form
Lots tab Actions Manifest Manifest Rail Cargo Manifest To Rail form
Cargo Manifest To Rail form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo On Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo On Board tab
You can use the Cargo Manifest to Rail form to manifest selected cargo lot(s) to a train visit or a railcar visit.
Manifesting a cargo lot to a train visit indicates that the cargo lot is on board the train. In this case, N4 creates a new
Break-bulk unit with the position on board the train. However, if there is already an existing cargo lot at the target
position, N4 does not create a new unit, it only adds the Quantity to the existing cargo lot and unit. You can then
perform other cargo related actions on the unit, such as unload it from the train (on page 125).
Prerequisites for manifesting cargo lot(s) to a train
• A train visit in the Created, Inbound, Arrived, or Working phase.
• A bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A default cargo lot.
To manifest selected cargo lot(s) to a train:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the default cargo lot(s) that you want to manifest to a vessel.
You can also use the paths specified for the Bill of Lading Inspector (on page 74), Bill of Lading form (on page
62), or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) at the top of this topic.
2. Select the Actions
Manifest
Manifest Rail option.
3. In the Cargo Manifest To Rail form:
a. From the Train Id field, select the train visit to which you want to manifest the cargo lot.
b. Optionally, from the Railcar Id field, select the railcar visit to which you want to manifest the cargo lot.
c. In the Slot field, enter the position on the train for the cargo lot. You can enter a maximum of 16 characters.
d. If you do not want to manifest the entire quantity, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field, accordingly.
For a default cargo lot, N4 allows you to enter a value that is greater than the value displayed in the Quantity
field. In this case, the default cargo lot Quantity is updated to a negative value after you successfully manifest
the cargo lot.
However, the Quantity field does not display for an Identified cargo lot. For an Identified cargo lot, the form
does not display the Quantity field. For more information on identifying a cargo lot, see Identified Lots tab (on
page 71).
e. Click Save.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
134
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Manufacture Cargo form
If successful, N4:
• Creates a new cargo lot, where:
▪ Position = Position on the train or railcar.
▪ Qty = Quantity specified in the Cargo Manifest To Rail form.
• Reduces the Quantity of the default cargo lot by the manifested Quantity above.
If the remaining Quantity for the default cargo lot is zero, the cargo lot is fully manifested and it no longer
displays in the Cargo Lots view.
• Creates a new Break-Bulk unit in the Units view and:
▪ Sets the Cargo Quantity = Quantity specified in the Cargo Manifest To Vessel form.
▪ Sets the Position = Position on the train or railcar.
▪ Displays the cargo lot in the Cargo Lots tab in the Unit Inspector.
▪ Displays the cargo lots in the Cargo on Board tab in the Train Inspector.
However, if you specify the Railcar Id, the cargo lots are displayed in the Cargo on Board tab in the
Railcar Visit Inspector.
3.3.15 Manufacture Cargo form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Manufacture Cargo
Manufacture Cargo form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
Some terminals have manufacturing or assembly operations as part of the complex. In such cases cargo does not
come from the outside; instead, it is manufactured in the yard. N4 enables you to create cargo lots for cargo that is
manufactured at the facility. When you manufacture cargo in N4, you can assign a valid yard position to the cargo lot.
This unit can then be loaded onto an outbound carrier to leave the facility.
For example, a bill of lading lists an order for a customer for five rolls of steel. When you produce the rolls, you can use
N4 to create a cargo lot for the rolls and assign a yard position so that you can load the cargo on to a vessel. The yard
position can represent the end of a manufacturing or assembly line where you collect the finished goods before they
are shipped.
Prerequisites for manufacturing cargo
• A vessel visit in the Working phase.
• An Export bill of lading (on page 59).
• A bill of lading item (on page 66) for bulk or non-bulk cargo.
• A default cargo lot (added when you save the BL item).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
135
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form
To manufacture cargo:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the default cargo lot(s) or the identified cargo lot(s) that you want to
manufacture.
If you select multiple cargo lots and any of the selected cargo lots is already associated with a unit, N4 displays an
error message.
2. Select Actions
Other
Manufacture Cargo.
3. In the Manufacture Cargo form:
a. Enter a valid Yard Position.
If you enter a yard position where you previously manufactured cargo (a unit already exists at that yard position),
N4 does not create a new unit record, instead it updates the existing unit to reflect the change in the quantity and
also records another CARGO_MANUFACTURED event against the Unit.
b. If you do not want to manufacture the entire cargo lot, edit the value in the Quantity field to specify the quantity
that you want to manufacture at the specified yard position.
However, the Quantity field does not display if you select multiple cargo lots in the list view or if you select an
identified cargo lot.
When the value specified in the Quantity field is less than the cargo lot quantity, N4 creates a new cargo lot
record with the specified quantity and reduces the same amount from the quantity for the selected cargo lot.
For example, if the quantity for the default cargo lot is 100, but you enter 60 in the Quantity field in the
Manufacture Cargo form, N4 creates the cargo lot and the unit record with Quantity = 60 and sets the Quantity
of the default cargo lot as 40.
c. Click Save.
When you successfully manufacture cargo at the specified yard position, N4:
• Updates the default cargo lot record in the Cargo Lots view with:
▪ Unit Nbr = Unit Nbr of the new unit created in the Units view.
▪ Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Manufacture Cargo form.
▪ Lot Type = Yard
▪ Lot Position = Yard Position specified in the Manufacture Cargo form.
• Creates a new unit in the Units view with:
▪ T-state = Yard
▪ Position = Yard Position specified in the Manufacture Cargo form.
▪ Cargo Quantity = Total quantity of the selected cargo lot(s).
If you select identified cargo lots in the Cargo Lots view, N4 creates a unit for each of the identified cargo
lots.
• Records the CARGO_MANUFACTURED event against the Unit and the Cargo Lot records.
3.3.16 Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity
Operations Cargo/Unit Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view Bill of Lading form Items tab
Lots tab Actions Other Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
136
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Transload form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo On Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo On Board tab
You can use the Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form to record a discrepancy if you notice that the actual Quantity for the
cargo lot does not match the Quantity in N4.
You cannot adjust the quantity of a default cargo lot or a retired cargo lot.
To adjust cargo lot quantity:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot for which you want to record the discrepancy.
2. Select the Actions Other
N4 disables this option.
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity option. If you select multiple cargo lots in the list view,
3. In the Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form:
a. In the New Quantity field, edit the value to represent the actual quantity for the cargo lot. You cannot enter a
value greater than the Quantity for default cargo lot.
b. In the Adjust Quantity Note field, enter a brief note describing the discrepancy.
c. Click Save.
If successful, N4:
• Records the DISCREPANCY_NOTED event for the cargo lot.
You can view the event details from the History, Events tab in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
• Updates the Default Cargo Lot Quantity = BL Item Quantity - Adjusted Qty
• Updates the Discrepancy = New Quantity - Original Quantity
You can view the Discrepancy field in the Status area in the Cargo Lot Inspector.
For example, if the BL Item Quantity is 120, Default Cargo Lot Qty is 90, and the manifested Quantity for one Cargo Lot
is 30. If you adjust the manifested cargo lot Quantity, and set it as 20, N4 sets the:
Default Cargo Lot Quantity = 120 - 20 = 100
Discrepancy = 20 - 30 = -10
A positive Discrepancy value indicates surplus while a negative Discrepancy value indicates shortage.
If you adjust the cargo lot Quantity to zero, N4 hides the cargo lot record from the Cargo Lots view and
Retires the unit record in the Units view.
3.3.17 Cargo Transload form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Transload
Cargo Transload form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
137
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Identify form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
You can use the Cargo Transload form to transload cargo lots.
You cannot use the Transload action from the Units view to transload the contents of a unit that contains cargo
lots. To transload cargo lots, you must use the Transload action from the Cargo Lots view (on page 96).
When the transload is successful, it results in four units (also referred to as unit facility visits (UFVs)) in N4. The two old
units (source and destination) are Retired and two new units (or UFVs) are created. In addition, N4:
• Records the CARGO_TRANSLOAD event(s) to the new full (FCL) unit.
The number of CARGO_TRANSLOAD events recorded is based on the number of cargo lots you transload. For
example, if you transload three cargo lots, N4 records the CARGO_TRANSLOAD event three times in the Event
History of the new full unit.
• Records the CARGO_TRANSLOAD event to the new Empty unit.
• Does not record any events for the Retired unit.
• Associates the cargo lots and the bill of lading with the new full unit.
• Records the following events:
▪ Retired Full unit: UNIT_TRANSLOAD_STRIP
▪ New Empty unit: UNIT_TRANSLOAD_TO_EMPTY and UNIT_TRANSLOAD
▪ Retired Empty unit: UNIT_TRANSLOAD_STUFF
▪ New Full unit: UNIT_TRANSLOAD_TO_FULL and UNIT_TRANSLOAD
Since N4 generates these additional events for a transload operation, ensure that you configure the billable
events correctly.
• Retains the event history of the source and destination units as part of the event history of the Retired units.
Notes
• You should not add Event Effects to the new events added for the Transload action.
3.3.18 Cargo Identify form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Identify Lot
Cargo Identify form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Unit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
138
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form
You can use the Cargo Identify form to identify cargo lots and assign them unique IDs. Cargo lot IDs must be unique
within a bill of lading (BL). In addition, you cannot identify a Default cargo lot.
3.3.19 Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Cancel Manifest
Operations Cargo/Unit Bills of Lading Bills of Lading view Bill of Lading form
Lots tab Actions Other Cancel Manifest Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form
Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Items tab
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo On Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo On Board tab
You can use the Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form to cancel or undo the manifest for the selected cargo lot(s).
When you cancel a manifest to a vessel or rail, N4:
• Returns the manifested Quantity to the default cargo lot.
• Deletes the B-Bulk unit from the Units view.
• Deletes the cargo lot from the Cargo Lots view (on page 96).
When you cancel a manifest to a container, N4:
• Returns the manifested Quantity to the default cargo lot.
• Does not delete the B-Bulk unit from the Units view; instead, it sets the Cargo Quantity = 0.
For an identified cargo lot, N4 does not delete the cargo lot.
To cancel a manifest:
1. In the Cargo Lots view, select the cargo lot(s) for which you want to cancel the manifest.
2. Select the Actions
Other
Cancel Manifest option.
3. In the Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form:
a. Select the Confirm Cancel Manifest? check box.
b. Click Save.
When canceling a manifest, you cannot select:
• A default cargo lot.
• A non-manifested cargo lot.
• A cargo lot where the manifested Quantity does not match the Cargo Lot Quantity because of a move action, such
as load, unload, or strip.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
139
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Split BL form
3.3.20 Cargo Split BL form
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Other
Split BL
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Split BL form
Actions
Other
Split BL
Cargo Split BL form
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Train Inspector
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visits view
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
Occasionally, you may have a bill of lading that you want to split into several small bills of lading to ease the processing
of items on the original BL. For example, you may have an Import shipment that actually belongs to multiple
consignees and you need to split the cargo so that you can control the delivery to each consignee separately.
You can split a bill of lading at the BL Item level or at the cargo lots level. To split the BL at the BL item level, see Item
Split BL form (on page 72).
Prerequisites
• To access the Actions
Other
Split BL option you must have the Cargo Lot - Split BL privilege.
To split the cargo lots to another bill of lading:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) you want to split.
The Lot Type of the selected cargo lot(s) must not be Truck. A gate transaction can be associated with only one
BL. If you split the BL for a cargo lot on a truck, the cargo lot(s) associated with the new BL will not be associated
with any active gate transaction and you will not be able to unload them from the truck.
2. Select Actions
Other
Split BL.
3. In the Cargo Split BL form:
a. Enter the target BL Number.
You can specify the ID of an existing BL or a new BL.
b. To partially split the cargo lot to the specified BL, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field. However, the
Quantity field does not display if you select multiple cargo lot in the list view.
c. Click Save.
If successful, N4:
• Adds or updates the bill of lading in the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) and sets the BL Number of the selected
cargo lot as the Original BL number of the BL record.
• Adds a new cargo lot in the Cargo Lots view.
• Adds a new unit in the Units view.
• Records the CARGO_SPLIT_OFF event in the History, Events tab of the new unit.
• Records the CARGO_SPLIT event in the History, Events tab of the unit associated with the original cargo lot.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
140
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Re-consign BL from
When you split a BL, N4 enforces the following conditions:
• The split BL must have all its cargo originate from the same original BL. Therefore, if the target BL already exists, its
Original BL number must match the BL Number of the selected cargo lots.
• If you select only one cargo lot, you can enter a partial quantity in the Cargo Split BL form. However, if you have
multiple cargo lots selected, you can specify only the target BL number and N4 assumes that the entire quantity of
each of the selected cargo lots is moved to the target BL.
• The cargo lots may not belong to the same Bill of Lading item. Based on the commodity, packaging, and product
type, N4 either uses an existing item or creates a new item.
• If present, N4 adds the transferred quantity to existing cargo lots for the same BL item and location otherwise it
creates a new cargo lot for each BL item and location.
3.3.21 Cargo Re-consign BL from
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Operations
BL form
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Other
Re-consign BL
Actions
Cargo Re-consign BL form
Other
Re-consign BL
Cargo Re-consign
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lots view
Cargo Lot Inspector
Bills of Lading view
Units view
Train Visits view
Items tab
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo Lots tab
Vessel Visit Inspector
Vessel Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Unit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
When you use the Split BL action (on page 140) from the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), N4 checks to ensure that all
the selected cargo lots are associated with the same BL. However, you can use the Re-consign BL action to select
cargo lots associated with different bills of lading and combine them into an existing or new BL. You can re-consign a
bill of lading at the BL Item level or at the cargo lots level. To re-consign the BL at the BL item level, see BL Item Reconsign BL form (on page 72).
Prerequisites
• To access the Actions
Other
Re-consign BL option you must have the Cargo Lot - Re-consign BL privilege.
To re-consign the cargo lots to another bill of lading:
1. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select the cargo lot(s) you want to re-consign.
The Lot Type of the selected cargo lot(s) must not be Truck. A gate transaction can be associated with only one
BL. If you re-consign the BL for a cargo lot on a truck, the cargo lot(s) associated with the new BL will not be
associated with any active gate transaction and you will not be able to unload them from the truck.
2. Select Actions
Other
Re-consign BL.
3. In the Cargo Re-consign BL form:
a. Enter the target BL Number.
You can specify the ID of an existing BL or a new BL.
b. To partially re-consign the cargo lot to the specified BL, edit the value displayed in the Quantity field. However,
the Quantity field does not display if you select multiple cargo lot in the list view.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
141
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Damages form (Cargo)
c. Click Save.
If successful, N4:
• Adds or updates the bill of lading in the Bills of Lading view (on page 59).
• Adds a new cargo lot in the Cargo Lots view.
• Adds a new unit in the Units view.
When you re-consign a BL, N4 enforces the following conditions:
• The selected cargo lots may or may not be associated with the same BL.
• The cargo lots may not belong to the same Bill of Lading item. Based on the commodity, packaging, and product
type, N4 either uses an existing item or creates a new item.
• If you select only one cargo lot, you can enter a partial quantity in the Cargo Re-consign BL form. However, if you
have multiple cargo lots selected, you can specify only the target BL number and N4 assumes that the entire
quantity of each of the selected cargo lots is moved to the target BL.
• If present, N4 adds the transferred quantity to existing cargo lots for the same BL item and location otherwise it
creates a new cargo lot for each BL item and location.
3.3.22 Damages form (Cargo)
Operations
Cargo
Cargo Lots
Cargo Lots view
Actions
Record Damages
Damages form
Bill of Lading Item form
Cargo Lots tab
From the Actions menu in the following Inspectors:
Cargo Lot Inspector
Cargo Lots view
Bills of Lading view
Vessel Visits view
Train Visits view
Railcar Visits
Bill of Lading Inspector
Vessel Visit Inspector
Train Inspector
Railcar Visits view
Items tab
Cargo Lots tab
Cargo on Board tab
Railcar Visit Inspector
Cargo on Board tab
You can use the Damages form to:
• Add damages for a cargo lot (on page 144).
• Update damages recorded for a cargo lot (on page 145).
• Delete damages recorded for a cargo lot (on page 145).
You can also use the Damages form to mark a damaged item as repaired. If you do not select a record in the list view
or select multiple records, N4 disables the Record Damage action.
In N4, when you record damages against a cargo lot, N4 splits the cargo lot and creates a new cargo lot for the
damaged items. This segregates the damaged cargo from the undamaged items.
For example, a cargo lot has 11 barrels and you record damages with quantity, three. N4 splits the cargo lot into two,
the original cargo lot is updated with quantity = 8, and a new cargo lot is created at the same position with quantity = 3.
Now you can track and move the damaged and undamaged items separately.
If the cargo lot position already has other damaged items, N4 combines any new damages recorded for the same
cargo lot if the bill of lading item (commodity, product type, and packaging) and the damage type of the damage record
is the same.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
142
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Damages form (Cargo)
When you record a damage for a cargo lot, N4:
• Creates separate cargo lots at the same location for the same BL Item if the set of damages associated with the
cargo lot are different.
• Retains the cargo lot damages when you move a cargo lot.
• Validates the Damage Quantity entered when recording damages and then splits the cargo lot.
• Combines damaged cargo lots at the same location if the BL Item and the Damage Type is the same.
If you merge two cargo lots with the same damage type but different severity, the damage severity of the target
cargo lot overrides the damage severity of the merged cargo lot.
• For Identified cargo lots, you can record damages even before you manifest the cargo lot. When you later manifest
the cargo lot, N4 simply updates the position of the Identified cargo lot without changing the Damage information.
The Damages tab (on page 105) in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) displays the damages recorded against
the selected cargo lot. In addition, if you record a major damage for a cargo lot, N4 displays the damaged icon in the
Cargo Lot Inspector.
You cannot record damages against the default cargo lot.
Cargo Damage Examples
The following examples illustrate some of the behavior related to cargo damages:
Example 1: A new Damage Lot is created.
• Lot 123-1 has Quantity = 7 and is in position X.
• You record a Damage (e.g Leaking) with Quantity = 3.
• N4 creates a new lot 123-2 with Quantity 3 and Damage Type = Leaking at position X.
• N4 reduces the Quantity of lot 123-1 to 4.
Example 2: You record additional damages to the Damaged Lot.
• Lot 123-2 has Quantity 3 and Damage Type = Leaking and is at position X.
• You record another damage (e.g. torn) with Quantity = 2.
• N4 creates a new lot 123-3 with Quantity = 2 and Damage Type = Leaking and Torn at position X.
• N4 reduces the Quantity of Lot 123-2 to 1.
Example 3: You move a part of the damaged lot to a new location.
• Lot 123-2 has Quantity 3 and Damage Type = Leaking and is at position X.
• You move Quantity = 2 to position Y.
• N4 creates a new lot 123-3 with Quantity = 2 and Damage Type = Leaking at position Y.
• N4 reduces the Quantity of lot 123-2 at position X to 1.
Example 4: You move a part of the damaged lot to a new location.
• Lot 123-2 has Quantity 3 and Damage Type = Leaking and is at position X.
• You move Quantity = 2 to position Y.
• N4 creates a new lot 123-3 with Quantity = 2 and Damage Type = Leaking at position Y.
• N4 reduces the Quantity of lot 123-2 at position X to 1.
• You move the remaining Quantity (1) of Lot 123-2 to position Y.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
143
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Damages form (Cargo)
• N4 combines the lots since the Damage Type and original BL # are the same.
Add damages to a cargo lot
You can use the Damages form (on page 142) to add damages for the selected cargo lot.
To add a damage item:
1. In the Damage Quantity field, edit the value if you want to record the damage for only a part of the cargo lot
quantity.
2. In the All Damage Items area, click
.
3. From the Damage Type lookup field, select a cargo damage type.
From this lookup field you can select only the cargo damage types that exist in N4. To add a new cargo damage
type, see Cargo Damage Types view (on page 36).
4. From the Damage Severity drop-down list, select Minor, Major, or Repaired to indicate the severity level of the
damage.
If a cargo lot has Major damages, N4 displays an icon in the left area in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
5. Enter any optional information for the damage such as the date when the damage was reported or repaired, and
damage description.
6. Click Add.
N4 lists the damage item in the All Damage Items area.
7. Repeat steps 1 - 5 to add all the applicable damages for the cargo lot.
8. Click Save.
If you click Close, N4 closes the form without saving the changes.
When you record a damage against a cargo lot, N4 records the CARGO_DAMAGE event (on page 145) for the cargo
lot. You can use the History, Events tab in the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101) to view the event details.
The following table lists the optional fields in the Damages form:
Field Label
Description
Damage Reported
Enter the date and time the damage was
reported. For more information, see
Entering dates and Entering time.
Damage Repaired
Enter the date and time the damage was
repaired. For more information, see
Entering dates and Entering time.
When you enter date and time in the
Repaired On field, N4 marks the selected
damage item as repaired.
Damage Description
Enter a short description for the damage.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
144
Part 3: Cargo Management
Cargo Lots view
Damages form (Cargo)
Update damages recorded for a cargo lot
You can use the Damages form (on page 142) to update the damages recorded for a cargo lot. In the Damages form,
you can also specify the Damage Repaired date to mark a damage item as repaired.
To update or repair a damage:
1. In the All Damage Items area, select the damage item you want to update.
N4 displays the details of the selected damage item in the Damage Item area.
To mark a damage item as repaired, enter a date in the Repaired On field.
2. Update the information displayed in the Damage Item area as required.
3. Click Save.
If you click Cancel or Close, N4 displays a dialog box warning you that edits will be lost. The message includes up
to 20 characters of changes for each of up to four fields, listed by label. Click Yes to discard changes and close the
form. Click No to return to the form and edit more fields or save your changes. System changes do not appear in the
warning list. To disable this warning, see How do I disable the Edits Will Be Lost dialog?
When you update a damage, N4 records the CARGO_DAMAGE event (on page 145) in the event history of the cargo
lot.
Delete damages recorded for a cargo lot
You can use the Damages form to delete the damages recorded for a cargo lot.
To delete a damage item:
1. In the All Damage Items area, select the damage item you want to delete.
2. Click
.
3. Click Save.
If you click Close, N4 closes the form without saving the changes.
If you delete all the damage items for a cargo lot, the cargo lot is no longer damaged.
When you delete a damage for a cargo lot, N4 records the CARGO_DAMAGE event (on page 145) against the cargo
lot.
CARGO_DAMAGE event
When you record damages for a cargo lot, N4 records the CARGO_DAMAGE event in the Event History of the target
cargo lot.
When recording the CARGO_DAMAGE event, N4 also records the changes to the following fields:
• Damage Quantity
• Damage Quantity Unit
• Cargo Damage Type
• Cargo Damage Severity
If you completely delete a damage record, the Cargo Damage Type field and the Cargo Damage Severity field are
set to null (as opposed to empty). Also, since the Quantity becomes zero, N4 retires the cargo lot.
N4 always records the CARGO_DAMAGE event to the unit associated with the cargo lot. If the cargo lot is inside a
container then it is the container unit; otherwise, it is the B-Bulk unit associated with the cargo lot.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
145
3.4 Pre-Advised Cargo view
Operations
Cargo
Pre-Advised Cargo
Pre-Advised Cargo view
Prerequisites
• To access the Pre-Advised Cargo view, you need to assign the Cargo Lot - View privilege to your user role.
The Pre-Advised Cargo view displays the cargo lots that are not associated with a unit. This view also includes the
identified cargo lots that have not been manifested, yet.
You cannot add, edit, or delete cargo lots from this view. However, you can view the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page
101) for the selected cargo lot and perform following Actions on the selected cargo lot(s):
• Edit Cargo Lot (on page 115): Edit some of the fields associated with the selected cargo lot record.
• Manifest Rail (on page 134): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a rail.
• Manifest Vessel (on page 132): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a vessel.
• Manifest Container (on page 131): Manifest the selected cargo lot(s) to a container.
• Manufacture Cargo (on page 135): Create cargo lots for cargo manufactured at the facility.
• Identify Lot (on page 138): Identify the contents of the selected cargo lot.
• Split BL (on page 140): Split the selected cargo lot(s) to a new or existing BL for ease of processing.
• Re-consign BL (on page 141): Re-consign the selected cargo lots to a new or existing BL.
• Record Damages (on page 142): Record damages for the selected cargo lot.
In addition, if you press CTRL+s keys, N4 displays the Select Action message box where you can type the first few
characters of the action that you want to perform to access the option.
In This Section
Pre-Advised Cargo Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
146
Part 3: Cargo Management
Pre-Advised Cargo view
Pre-Advised Cargo Columns
Pre-Advised Cargo Columns
Short Label
Long Label
In Filter?
Sorting?
Group?
BL Category
Inbound BL Item X
BL Category
X
02-Order
BL Nbr
Inbound BL Item X
BL Number
X
02-Order
Cargo Lot Id
Cargo Lot Id
X
X
01-Cargo
Commodity
Inbound BL Item X
Commodity
X
02-Order
Consignee
Inbound BL Item X
Consignee
X
02-Order
Created
Record Create
Date
X
X
01-Cargo
Default
Default Lot
X
X
01-Cargo
Item Nbr
Inbound BL Item X
Number
X
02-Order
Line Op
Inbound BL Item X
Line Operator
X
02-Order
Lot Planned
Position
Lot Planned
Position
X
X
01-Cargo
Lot Total Weight
Lot Total Weight
X
X
01-Cargo
LotGkey
LotGkey
X
X
01-Cargo
Packaging
Inbound BL Item X
Packaging
X
02-Order
Product
Inbound BL Item X
Product
X
02-Order
Qty
Quantity
X
X
01-Cargo
Shipper
Inbound BL Item X
Shipper
X
02-Order
Ves. Visit
Inbound BL Item X
Vessel Visit Ref.
X
04-Routing
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
147
Part 4
N4 Mobile Cargo
In this Section:
Cargo Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
148
4.1 Cargo Inventory
The Cargo Inventory application enables you to inspect cargo lots and perform various actions, such as load and
unload cargo lots from a carrier (vessel, truck, or rail), stuff cargo lots, strip cargo lots, and identify cargo lots. The
INVMOBILE_RDT005 (MOBILE_CARGO_INVENTORY_POPULATE_QTY) (on page 40) setting determines whether
to display or hide the cargo lot quantity in the Quantity field in all N4 Mobile Cargo Inventory programs.
To use the Cargo Inventory application:
1. Click one of the following buttons:
▪ Stuff Cargo (on page 151): Search and stuff cargo lots into a container.
▪ Strip Cargo (on page 153): Search and strip cargo lots from a container.
▪ Vessel Load (on page 155): Search and load cargo lots to a vessel.
▪ Vessel UnLoad (on page 157): Search and unload cargo lots from a vessel.
▪ Truck Load (on page 160): Search and load cargo lots to a truck.
▪ Truck UnLoad (on page 162): Search and unload cargo lots from a truck.
▪ Rail Load (on page 164): Search and load cargo lots to a train visit.
▪ Rail UnLoad (on page 166): Search and unload cargo lots from a train visit.
▪ Inspect Cargo (on page 168): Search and inspect cargo lots.
▪ Identify Cargo (on page 170): Search and Identify cargo lots.
▪ Record Damages (on page 172): Search and record damages for a cargo lot.
▪ Move Cargo (on page 173): Move cargo lots.
2. Depending on the button that you click, N4 displays the appropriate form.
The following graphic displays a sample Cargo Inventory application:
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
149
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Pre-Advised Cargo Columns
Depending on your privileges (on page 54) your form may look different.
In This Section
Stuff Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Strip Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Vessel Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Vessel UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Truck Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Truck UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Rail Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rail UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Inspect Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Identify Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Record Damages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Move Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
150
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Stuff Cargo
4.1.1 Stuff Cargo
You can use the Stuff Cargo button to search for cargo lots associated with a service order that you want to stuff into a
container. In addition to the service order and the unit ID, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both
to search for a cargo lot to stuff.
4.1.1.1 Stuff - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots that you want to stuff into a container in the yard. If a cargo unit
is already Retired or if a cargo lot is already stuffed into a container, you cannot select the same cargo lot to stuff
again.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Enter the Service Order number.
2. Enter the Unit ID.
If the T-State of the unit is not Yard, N4 displays an error message.
If the specified unit is not in yard, not found, or is not associated with the bill of lading, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
3. Optionally, enter the BL number for the cargo lot that you want to stuff into the container.
4. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the specified cargo lot is not associated with the bill of lading, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, BL or Cargo Lot.
5. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 153);
otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 155).
4.1.1.2 Stuff - Validate form
The Validate form displays the following details related to the unit, bill of lading, and the cargo lot:
• Unit ID
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
151
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Stuff Cargo
To stuff the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify the Unit ID of the unit into which you want to stuff the cargo lot.
2. Edit the Quantity to stuff the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory stuffs the entire quantity of the cargo lot into the
specified unit.
3. Select the Direct Stuff check box to perform a stuff operation directly from a truck into a container.
4. Select the Truck Complete check box to move the truck to the next stage after the stuff operation.
5. Click
.
After the stuff action is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view
(on page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you stuff the entire quantity of a cargo lot, N4:
• In the Units view:
▪ Retires the B-Bulk unit and sets the Cargo Quantity = 0.
▪ Records the CARGO_STUFF event for the B-Bulk unit.
You can use the Unit Inspector History, Events tab or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101)
Events tab to view the details of the event.
History,
▪ If the Freight Kind of the selected container unit is Empty, N4 retires the unit and creates a new unit with Freight
Kind = FCL.
▪ If the Freight Kind of the selected unit is FCL or LCL, N4 does not retire the unit.
▪ Adds the cargo lot Quantity to the Cargo Quantity of the container unit.
▪ Records the UNIT_STUFF event for the container unit.
For the Cargo Stuff action, N4 records a CARGO_STUFF event each time you stuff a partial or full quantity
to a unit. However, it records the UNIT_STUFF action only once when you stuff the first cargo lot into the
unit.
• In the Cargo Lots view:
▪ Sets the Lot Type of the cargo lot as Container.
▪ Associates the new unit with the cargo lot in the Unit Nbr field.
▪ Updates the position of the cargo lot to match the Position of the new FCL container in the Yard.
If you specified a service order in the Stuff - Search form (on page 151), N4 also updates the status of the service
order after successfully completing the stuff action.
4.1.1.3 Stuff - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the unit and the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 151),
Cargo Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Unit ID
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
152
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Strip Cargo
• Service Order
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to stuff into the
container. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 151) for the selected cargo lot.
After you stuff the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to stuff the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form.
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.2 Strip Cargo
You can use the Strip Cargo button to search for cargo lots associated with a bill of lading (BL) that you want to strip
from a container. In addition to the unit ID, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both to search for
a cargo lot to strip.
4.1.2.1 Strip - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots that you want to strip from a container in the yard.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Enter the Unit ID.
If the T-State of the unit is not Yard, N4 displays an error message.
If the specified unit is not in yard, not found, or is not associated with the bill of lading, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
2. Optionally, enter the BL number for the cargo lot that you want to strip from the container.
3. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the specified cargo lot is not associated with the unit, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, BL or Cargo Lot.
4. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page
153); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 155).
4.1.2.2 Strip - Validate form
The Validate form displays the following details related to the unit, bill of lading, and the cargo lot:
• Unit ID
• Bill of Lading
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
153
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Strip Cargo
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
• Container Empty?
You can edit, the Position, Quantity, and Container Empty? fields.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To strip the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify the Position in the yard where you want to strip the cargo lot.
2. Edit the Quantity to strip the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory strips the entire quantity of the cargo lot to the specified
location.
3. Select the Container Empty? check box to indicate that you have stripped all the cargo lots from the unit.
If you select the Container Empty? check box, but there are additional cargo lots in the container, Cargo Inventory
displays an error message.
4. Click
.
After the strip is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view (on
page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you strip the entire quantity of a cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the yard Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
If you strip only a part of the cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4:
▪ Creates a new cargo unit and updates the new unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
▪ Quantity = Quantity specified in step 2 above
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
154
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Vessel Load
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the yarf Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit at the yard location as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
4.1.2.3 Strip - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the unit and the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 153),
Cargo Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Unit ID
• Bill of Lading
• Service Order
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to strip from the
container. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 153) for the selected cargo lot.
After you strip the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to strip the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form.
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.3 Vessel Load
The Vessel Load button enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard and load them to a vessel. In addition to the
vessel visit, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both to search for a cargo lot to load.
4.1.3.1 Load Vessel - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard that you want to load on a specific vessel visit.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Enter the Vessel Visit ID.
If the vessel visit is not found or is not in the Working phase, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the Bill of Lading ID for the cargo lot that you want to load on the vessel.
If you enter a value, the vessel visit for the bill of lading must match the vessel visit specified in step 1.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
155
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Vessel Load
3. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the cargo lot is not associated with the specified bill of lading or is not in the yard, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, Bill of Lading or Cargo Lot.
4. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Load form (on page 156);
otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 157).
4.1.3.2 Load Vessel - Load form
The Load form displays the following details related to the vessel visit, bill of lading, and the cargo lot:
• Vessel Visit ID
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
All the fields, except Position and Quantity are displayed in the view-only mode.
To load the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify the Position on the vessel where you want to load the cargo lot.
2. Edit the Quantity to load the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory loads the entire quantity of the cargo lot to the vessel.
3. Click
.
After the load is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view (on
page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you load the entire quantity of a cargo lot:
• To a new position on the vessel, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Loaded
▪ Position = Position on the vessel (specified in step 1 above)
• To a position on the vessel where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the vessel Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Retires the unit in the Yard location.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
156
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Vessel UnLoad
If you load only a part of the cargo lot:
• To a new position on the vessel, N4:
▪ Creates a new cargo unit and updates the new unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Loaded
▪ Position = Position on the vessel (specified in step 1 above)
▪ Quantity = Quantity specified in step 2 above
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit at the yard location as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
• To a position on the vessel where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the vessel Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit at the yard location as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
4.1.3.3 Load Vessel - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 155), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Vessel Visit ID
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to load on the
vessel. Cargo Inventory displays the Load form (on page 156) for the selected cargo lot.
After you load the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to load the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form (on page 155).
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.4 Vessel UnLoad
The Vessel UnLoad button enables you to search for cargo lots on a vessel and discharge them to a yard location. In
addition to the vessel visit, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both to search for a cargo lot you
want to discharge from the vessel.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
157
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Vessel UnLoad
4.1.4.1 Discharge Vessel - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots on a vessel that you want to discharge to a specific yard
location.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Enter the Vessel Visit ID.
If the vessel visit is not found or is not in the Arrived or Working phase, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the Bill of Lading ID for the cargo lot that you want to discharge from the vessel.
If you enter a value, the vessel visit for the bill of lading must match the vessel visit specified in step 1.
3. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the cargo lot is not associated with the specified bill of lading or is not on the vessel, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, Bill of Lading or Cargo Lot.
4. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Vessel UnLoad - Validate
form (on page 158); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 159).
4.1.4.2 Vessel UnLoad - Validate form
The Vessel UnLoad - Validate form displays the following details related to the vessel visit, bill of lading, and the cargo
lot:
• Vessel Visit ID
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
All the fields, except Position and Quantity are displayed in the view-only mode.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To discharge the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify a valid Position in the yard where you want to discharge the cargo lot.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
158
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Vessel UnLoad
2. Edit the Quantity to discharge the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory discharges the entire quantity of the cargo lot to the
specified yard position.
3. Click
.
After the discharge is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view
(on page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you discharge the entire quantity of a cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot in the yard by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Retires the unit on the vessel.
If you discharge only a part of the cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4:
▪ Creates a new cargo unit and updates the new unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
▪ Quantity = Quantity specified in step 2 above
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit on the vessel as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot in the yard by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit on the vessel as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
4.1.4.3 Discharge Vessel - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 158), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Vessel Visit ID
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
159
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Truck Load
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to discharge from
the vessel. Cargo Inventory displays the Vessel UnLoad - Validate form (on page 158) for the selected cargo lot.
After you discharge the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to discharge the other cargo lots or you can click the
158).
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form (on page
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.5 Truck Load
The Truck Load button enables you to load cargo lots from a yard location onto a truck and proceed the truck to the
next gate stage. At this stage, N4 assumes that the truck has already passed the ingate stage of a Deliver Break-Bulk
(DB) gate transaction and has entered the yard to pick up cargo approved by a gate clerk. You cannot enter cargo lot
Quantity in the Truck Load form. You must use the Validate Load form (on page 161) to enter the cargo lot Quantity.
Pre-requisites for loading cargo on a truck:
• Active Truck Visit for the specified Truck License Number.
• Truck Visit is associated with a valid Bill of Lading (BL) through a Deliver Break-Bulk (DB) gate transaction.
• Cargo lot is in the yard.
4.1.5.1 Load Cargo - Search form
When you click the Truck Load button, N4 displays the Load Cargo - Search form. You can use the Search form to
search for the truck visit using the Truck License, Bill of Lading (BL) Nbr, or a Delivery Order Number.
To search for the truck visit:
1. Optionally, enter the Truck License of the truck on which you want to load the cargo.
If an active truck visit for the specified truck license is not found, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the Bill of Lading number for the cargo lot that you want to load onto the truck.
The bill of lading must be associated with the truck license specified in step 1 as part of a Deliver Break-Bulk (BB)
gate transaction.
3. Optionally, enter the Delivery Order number associated with the truck visit.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, Truck License or Bill of Lading.
4. Click
.
If you specify only one of the above values and multiple truck visits are returned, Cargo Inventory displays the
Matching Visits form (on page 161); otherwise, it displays the Select Cargo To Load form (on page 160).
4.1.5.2 Load Cargo - Select Cargo To Load form
You can use the Select Cargo To Load form to specify the BL Item and the Cargo Lot that you want to load onto the
selected truck visit.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
160
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Truck Load
However, if you do not want to manually enter the Cargo Lot information, you can click
Validate Load form (on page 161).
to proceed to the
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate Load form;
otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 161).
4.1.5.3 Load Cargo - Validate Load form
You can use the Validate Load form to specify the Quantity that you want to load to the selected truck visit. The
Quantity field displays the Cargo Lot Quantity, however, you can edit this value if you want to load only a part of the
cargo lot to the truck.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
After you have specified the quantity to be loaded onto the truck, click
. Cargo Inventory returns to the Select
Cargo To Load form (on page 160) and displays a message indicating that the cargo lot was successfully loaded onto
the truck. This also completes the associated gate transaction.
If you have loaded all the cargo lots to the truck, click Done to complete the gate transaction at the yard stage and
enable the truck to move to the next gate stage. If the yard stage is the last stage for the truck visit, N4 also marks the
truck visit as completed. If you click Done before loading all the cargo lots onto the truck, Cargo Inventory displays an
error message.
4.1.5.4 Load Cargo - Matching Visits form
If the specified truck license, BL number, and Deliver Order number combination returns multiple records, Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Visits form.
The Matching Visits form displays the following information:
• BL Nbr
• Delivery Order
• Truck License
From the list displayed in the Matching Visits form, select the BL or the truck license that you want to process. Cargo
Inventory displays the Select Cargo To Load form (on page 160).
4.1.5.5 Load Cargo - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 160), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Delivery Order
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
161
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Truck UnLoad
▪ Position
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot, based on the position in the
yard, that you want to load onto the truck. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate Load form (on page 161) for the
selected cargo lot.
After you specify the Quantity and click
to load the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Select
Cargo To Load form (on page 160). You can repeat the steps to load remaining cargo lots associated with the truck
license.
You can also click the
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.6 Truck UnLoad
The Truck UnLoad button enables you to unload cargo lots from a truck to a yard location and clear the truck for the
outgate stage. At this stage, N4 assumes that the truck has already passed the ingate stage of a Receive Break-Bulk
(RB) gate transaction and has entered the yard to drop off the cargo approved by a gate clerk.
Pre-requisites for unloading cargo from a truck:
• Active Truck Visit for the specified Truck License Number.
• Truck Visit is associated with a valid Bill of Lading (BL) through a Receive Break-Bulk (RB) gate transaction.
• Cargo lot is manifested on the truck.
To manifest a cargo lot on the truck as part of the ingate stage, include the CreateBreakbulkUnit
business task at the ingate stage for the Receive Break-Bulk (RB) gate transaction type.
4.1.6.1 UnLoad Cargo - Search form
When you click the Truck UnLoad button, N4 displays the UnLoad Cargo - Search form. You can use the Search
form to search for the truck visit from which you want to unload the cargo lots.
To search for the truck visit:
1. Optionally, enter the Truck License of the truck from which you want to unload the cargo.
If an active truck visit for the specified truck license is not found, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the Bill of Lading number for the cargo lot that you want to unload from the truck.
The bill of lading must be associated with the truck license specified in step 1 as part of a Receive Break-Bulk (RB)
gate transaction.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, Truck License or Bill of Lading.
3. Click
.
If you specify only the truck license or only the BL Nbr and the specified truck license is associated with multiple BLs or
the specified BL is associated with multiple truck licenses, Cargo Inventory displays the Matching BL form (on page
163); otherwise, it displays the Select Cargo To UnLoad form (on page 163).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
162
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Truck UnLoad
4.1.6.2 UnLoad Cargo - Select Cargo To UnLoad form
You can use the Select Cargo To UnLoad form to specify the BL Item and the Cargo Lot that you want to unload
from the selected truck visit.
However, if you do not want to manually enter the Cargo Lot information, you can click
Validate Unload form (on page 163).
to proceed to the
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate Unload form (on
page 163); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 163).
4.1.6.3 UnLoad Cargo - Validate Unload form
You can use the Validate Unload form to specify the yard Position where you want to unload the selected cargo lot. In
addition, you can edit the Quantity field if you do not want to unload the entire contents to the same yard Position.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
. Cargo Inventory returns to the Select Cargo To UnLoad form (on
After you specify the yard Position, click
page 163) and displays a message indicating that the cargo lot was successfully unloaded from the truck.
If you have unloaded all the cargo lots from the truck, click Done to complete the gate transaction at the yard stage and
enable the truck to move to the next gate stage. If the yard stage is the last stage for the truck visit, N4 also marks the
truck visit as completed. If you click Done before unloading all the cargo from a truck, Cargo Inventory displays an
error message.
4.1.6.4 UnLoad Cargo - Matching BL form
If the specified BL is associated with multiple truck licenses or if the specified truck license is associated with multiple
BLs, Cargo Inventory displays the Matching BL form.
The Matching BL form displays the following information:
• BL Nbr
• Truck License
From the list displayed in the Matching BL form, select the BL or the truck license that you want to process. Cargo
Inventory displays the Select Cargo To UnLoad form (on page 163).
4.1.6.5 UnLoad Cargo - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 162), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Truck License
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
163
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Rail Load
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to unload from the
truck. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate Unload form (on page 163) for the selected cargo lot.
After you specify the Position and click
to unload the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the
Search form. You can repeat the steps to unload all the cargo lots associated with the truck license.
You can also click the
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.7 Rail Load
The Rail Load button enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard and load them to a train visit or a railcar visit. In
addition to a train visit or a railcar visit, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both to search for a
cargo lot to load.
4.1.7.1 Rail Load - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard that you want to load on a specific train visit or railcar
visit.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Optionally, enter the Rail Visit.
If the train visit is not found or is not in the Working phase, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the RailCar ID.
If the railcar visit is not found or is not associated with the specified train visit, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
You must enter either the Rail Visit or the RailCar ID.
3. Optionally, enter the BL number for the cargo lot that you want to load on the train.
4. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the cargo lot is not associated with the specified bill of lading or is not in the yard, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, BL or Cargo Lot.
5. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page
164); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 166).
4.1.7.2 Rail Load - Validate form
The Validate form displays the following details related to the train visit or the railcar visit, bill of lading, and the cargo
lot:
• Rail Visit
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
164
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Rail Load
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To load the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify the Position on the railcar where you want to load the cargo lot.
2. Edit the Quantity to load the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory loads the entire quantity of the cargo lot to the railcar.
3. Click
.
After the load is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view (on
page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you load the entire quantity of a cargo lot:
• To a new position on the railcar, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Loaded
▪ Position = Position on the railcar (specified in step 1 above)
• To a position on the railcar where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the railcar Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Retires the unit in the Yard location.
If you load only a part of the cargo lot:
• To a new position on the railcar, N4:
▪ Creates a new cargo unit and updates the new unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Loaded
▪ Position = Position on the railcar (specified in step 1 above)
▪ Quantity = Quantity specified in step 2 above
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit at the yard location as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
• To a position on the railcar where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot at the railcar Position by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
165
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Rail UnLoad
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit at the yard location as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
4.1.7.3 Rail Load - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 164), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Rail Visit
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Position
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to load on the
railcar. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 164) for the selected cargo lot.
After you load the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to load the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form (on page 164).
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.8 Rail UnLoad
The Rail UnLoad button enables you to search for cargo lots on a railcar and discharge them to a yard location. In
addition to the train visit and the railcar visit, you can specify either the bill of lading or the cargo lot or both to search
for a cargo lot you want to discharge from the railcar.
4.1.8.1 Unload Rail - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots on a railcar that you want to unload to a specific yard location.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Optionally, enter the Rail Visit.
If the train visit is not found or is not in the Working phase, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
2. Optionally, enter the RailCar ID.
If the railcar visit is not found or is not associated with the specified train visit, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
You must enter either the Rail Visit or the RailCar ID.
3. Optionally, enter the Bill of Lading number for the cargo lot that you want to unload from the railcar.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
166
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Rail UnLoad
4. Optionally, enter the Cargo Lot ID.
If the cargo lot is not associated with the specified bill of lading or is not on the railcar, Cargo Inventory displays an
error.
You must specify at least one of the optional values, Bill of Lading or Cargo Lot.
5. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page
167); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 168).
4.1.8.2 Unload Rail - Validate form
`The Unload Rail - Validate form displays the following details related to the train visit, bill of lading, and the cargo lot:
• Rail Visit
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Position
• Quantity
All the fields, except Position and Quantity are displayed in the view-only mode.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To unload the specified cargo lot:
1. Specify a valid Position in the yard where you want to unload the cargo lot.
2. Edit the Quantity if you want to unload the cargo lot partially.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory unloads the entire quantity of the cargo lot to the
specified yard position.
3. Click
.
After the unload is completed successfully, you can see the changes reflected in the Units view, Cargo Lots view (on
page 96), and the Bills of Lading view (on page 59) in N4.
If you unload the entire quantity of a cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
167
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Inspect Cargo
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot in the yard by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Retires the unit on the railcar.
If you unload only a part of the cargo lot:
• To a new position in the yard, N4:
▪ Creates a new cargo unit and updates the new unit as follows:
▪ T-State = Yard
▪ Position = Position in the yard (specified in step 1 above)
▪ Quantity = Quantity specified in step 2 above
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit on the railcar as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
• To a position in the yard where other cargo lots already exist, N4 updates the cargo unit as follows:
▪ Increases the existing Quantity of the cargo lot in the yard by the Quantity specified in step 2 above.
▪ Updates the existing cargo unit on the railcar as follows:
▪ Quantity = Original Quantity - Quantity moved
4.1.8.3 Unload Rail - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 166), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Rail Visit
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to unload from the
railcar. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 167) for the selected cargo lot.
After you unload the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to unload the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form (on page 166).
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.9 Inspect Cargo
You can use the Inspect Cargo button to search for and inspect cargo lots. You can search for cargo lots based on
Position, Bill of Lading, Cargo Lot ID, or Marks. You must specify at least one of the criteria to search for a cargo lot.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
168
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Inspect Cargo
4.1.9.1 Inspect - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard that you want to inspect.
To search and inspect a cargo lot:
1. Enter a Position, Bill of Lading, Cargo Lot ID, or Marks for the cargo lot.
You must specify at least one of the optional values.
2. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 169);
otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 170).
4.1.9.2 Inspect - Validate form
The Validate form displays the following details related to the cargo lot:
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Marks
• Position
• Quantity
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To identify the selected cargo lot:
1. Inspect and edit any value according to your requirement.
2. Click
.
If you update the Quantity for the cargo lot, N4:
• Updates the Discrepancy column for the cargo lot as follows:
Discrepancy = Updated Quantity - Manifested Quantity
A negative discrepancy indicates surplus while a positive discrepancy indicates a shortage.
• Records the DISCREPANCY_NOTED event against the cargo unit.
You can use the Unit Inspector History, Events tab or the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101)
Events tab to view the details of the event.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
History,
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
169
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Identify Cargo
If you update the Position of the cargo lot, N4:
• Records the CARGO_POSITION_UPDATED event against the cargo unit.
Cargo Inventory returns you to the Search form (on page 169).
4.1.9.3 Inspect - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 169), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to inspect. Cargo
Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 169) for the selected cargo lot.
After you inspect the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to inspect the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form.
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.10 Identify Cargo
You can use the Identify Cargo button to search for and identify cargo lots. You can search for cargo lots based on
Position, Bill of Lading, Marks, or Cargo Lot ID. You must specify at least one of the criteria to search for a cargo lot.
4.1.10.1 Identify Cargo - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard that you want to identify.
To search and identify a cargo lot:
1. Enter a Position, Bill of Lading, Cargo Lot ID, or Marks for the cargo lot.
You must specify at least one of the optional values.
2. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 171);
otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 171).
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
170
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Identify Cargo
4.1.10.2 Identify Cargo - Validate form
The Validate form displays the following details related to the cargo lot:
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Commodity
• Product
• Package
• Marks
• Position
• Quantity
• Cargo ID
You can edit only the Cargo ID field.
If you want to use flex fields, they must first be configured in N4. N4 Mobile supports the unitFlexString01 unitFlexString15 flex fields. For more information, see Use flex fields in Navis N4: Customization Administrator Guide.
Once configured, you can then configure the N4 Mobile forms to display only the flex fields you want.
To identify the selected cargo lot:
1. In the Cargo ID field, enter an ID that uniquely identifies the cargo.
2. Click
.
Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form (on page 171), where the new identified cargo lot is also
displayed.
If successful, N4:
• Reduces the Quantity of the selected cargo lot by one.
• Create a new Identified Cargo Lot.
• Assigns the T-state and the Position of the parent cargo lot to the new cargo lot unit.
4.1.10.3 Identify Cargo - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 170), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information:
• Bill of Lading
• For each cargo lot:
▪ Cargo Lot ID
▪ BL Item
▪ Commodity
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
171
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Record Damages
▪ Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to identify. Cargo
Inventory displays the Validate form (on page 171) for the selected cargo lot.
After you identify the selected cargo lot, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Matching Cargo form. You can either
continue to identify the other cargo lots or you can click the
You can also click the
button to go back to the Search form.
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.11 Record Damages
You can use the Record Damages button to search for cargo lots against which you want to record damages. You can
also specify a bill of lading, and Cargo Inventory displays the cargo lots associated with the bill of lading.
4.1.11.1 Record Damages - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots against which you want to record damages.
To search for a cargo lot:
1. Optionally enter the Position of the cargo lot against which you want to record damages.
2. Enter the Bill of Lading number, the Cargo Lot ID, or both for the cargo lot.
If the specified cargo lot is not associated with the bill of lading, Cargo Inventory displays an error.
You must specify at least one of the values, Bill of Lading or Cargo Lot.
3. Optionally, enter any Marks that identify the cargo lot.
4. Click
.
If you enter a valid Cargo Lot ID, Cargo Inventory displays the Record Damages - Validate Record Damage form (on
page 172). However, if you enter a valid bill of lading that has multiple cargo lots associated with it, Cargo Inventory
displays the Record Damages - Matching Cargo form (on page 173).
4.1.11.2 Record Damages - Validate Record Damage form
The Validate Record Damage form displays the following details related to the bill of lading and the cargo lot:
• Bill of Lading
• BL Item
• Cargo Lot
• Position
• Quantity
For each cargo lot, you can record up to two damages using the Validate Record Damage form. To record more than
two damages, you must use the Record Damages action in from the Cargo Lots view (on page 96) in N4.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
172
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Move Cargo
To record damages for the selected cargo lot:
1. Specify the Quantity for which you want to record the damage.
The Quantity field displays the available undamaged quantity for the cargo lot.
You cannot enter a negative value in this field.
If you do not change the displayed quantity, Cargo Inventory records the damages against the entire quantity of the
cargo lot.
2. Select the Damage type that you want to record for the selected cargo lot.
3. Select the Severity of the damage:
▪ Minor
▪ Major
▪ Repaired: Use this option if you are repairing a damage previously recorded against the cargo lot.
4. Optionally, enter a Description for the damage.
5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 if you want to record another damage for the selected cargo lot.
6. Click
.
4.1.11.3 Record Damages - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 151), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information for each cargo lot:
• Cargo Lot ID
• BL Item
• Commodity
• Product
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot against which you want to
record the damages. Cargo Inventory displays the Validate Record Damage form (on page 172) for the selected
cargo lot.
After you record the damages for the selected cargo lots, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Search form (on page
172). You can either continue to record damages for other cargo lots associated with the bill of lading or specify
another BL in the Search form.
You can also click the
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
4.1.12 Move Cargo
You can use the Move Cargo button to move cargo lots from N4 Mobile. You can search for cargo lots based on
Position, Bill of Lading, Cargo Lot ID, or Marks. You must specify at least one of the criteria to search for a cargo lot.
4.1.12.1 Move Cargo - Search form
The Search form enables you to search for cargo lots in the yard that you want to move.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
173
Part 4: N4 Mobile Cargo
Cargo Inventory
Move Cargo
To search and move a cargo lot:
1. Enter a Position, Bill of Lading, Cargo Lot ID, or Marks for the cargo lot.
You must specify at least one of the optional values.
2. Click
.
If only one cargo lot is found matching the specified criteria, Cargo Inventory displays the Quantity and Position form
(on page 174); otherwise, it displays the Matching Cargo form (on page 174).
4.1.12.2 Move Cargo - Quantity and Position form
The Quantity and Position form displays the Quantity and Position fields for you to define the cargo lot movement.
To Define and Move a Cargo Lot:
1. Modify the number in the Quantity field so that it accurately reflects the amount of cargo to be moved.
2. In the Position field, enter the position to move cargo to.
Cargo Inventory returns you to the Search form (on page 173), where a banner confirming the new cargo lot now
appears at the top.
4.1.12.3 Move Cargo - Matching Cargo form
If there are multiple cargo lots associated with the bill of lading specified in the Search form (on page 173), Cargo
Inventory displays the Matching Cargo form.
The Matching Cargo form displays the following information for each cargo lot:
• Cargo Lot ID
• BL Item
• Position
• Marks
From the list of Cargo Lot IDs displayed in the Matching Cargo form, select the cargo lot you want to move. Cargo
Inventory displays the Quantity and Position form (on page 174) for the selected cargo lot.
After you move the selected cargo lots, Cargo Inventory returns you to the Search form. You can either continue to
move other cargo lots associated with your search criteria or specify new search criteria in the Search form (on page
173).
You can also click the
button to go back to the list of N4 Mobile applications.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
174
Part 5
Cargo How Do I...
This section includes the frequently asked questions for cargo.
Cargo How Do I.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
175
5.1 Cargo How Do I...
How do I ...
In This Section
Associate/Disassociate a non-archetype commodity with/from the archetype commodity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cancel a break-bulk gate transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configure Holds/Permissions to prevent break-bulk cargo events from being recorded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Enter cargo lot Quantity for truck loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Prevent delivering a cargo quantity greater than what's specified in the cargo delivery order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing cargo lots for another facility in the complex. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Prevent getting same bill of lading (BL) in the same Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Print barcode labels for the cargo arriving by truck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Process identified cargo lots using Gate API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Record a Billable Event Type for a Cargo Lot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Set up Inbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Set up Outbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical commodities.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Create invoice for multiple cargo lots using the 'generate-invoice-request' API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
176
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Associate/Disassociate a non-archetype commodity with/from the archetype commodity
5.1.1 Associate/Disassociate a non-archetype commodity
with/from the archetype commodity
Associate non-archetype commodity with the archetype
In order to optimize the usage of enormous amount of commodities created in N4, you can associate the nonarchetype commodities with the master archetype commodities. You can reference one or more non-archetype
commodity(s) with the archetype commodity(s). For better performance, N4 sends only the master archetype
commodities to XPS during startup of the application. If you add an Arch Commodity after XPS start-up, N4 sends this
update to XPS only after you apply one of the subordinate commodities to a container, which in turn refers to the newly
created Arch Commodity.
In N4 you can associate non-archetype commodities using Add Commodity form (on page 18) or Assign Archetype
Commodity form (on page 22) only if there exists an archetype commodity in the current scope level. You can create
an commodity using the Add Commodity form and select the Is Archetype check box to make it an archetype
commodity. You can also edit a non-archetype commodity and make it an archetype by selecting the Is Archetype
check box. N4 lists all the archetype commodities created for the current scope in the Archetype drop-down list in the
Add Commodity form. However, for an archetype commodity, the Archetype drop-down list appears grayed out.
Non-admin users should have the CARGO_EDIT (on page 51) privilege to work with the archetype functionality.
To associate using Add Commodity form:
1. Create or edit a non-archetype commodity code with relevant attributes in the Add Commodity form.
2. For the non-archetype commodity, select a archetype commodity from the Archetype drop-down list.
To associate one or more non-archetype commodities, use the following procedure.
To associate using Assign Archetype Commodity form:
1. Create/edit one or more non-archetype commodity codes with relevant attributes in the Add Commodity form.
2. Select one or more non-archetype commodities, and open Assign Archetype Commodity form from the Actions
menu. You can also right click the on the selected commodities to open the Assign Archetype Commodity form.
When you select only one non-archetype, N4 allows you to select the master from the drop-down list. But when you
select more than one, you have to enable the drop-down list by selecting the Archetype check box.
3. Select an archetype commodity from the Archetype drop-down field.
N4 associates the non-archetype commodity with the archetype commodity and displays the corresponding
Commodity ID in the Arch field in the Commodities view (on page 17). However, when you try to assign an
archetype commodity to a master (archetype) commodity itself, N4 ignores this action and does not raise any warning
or error.
Dis-associate non-archetype commodity from the archetype
When you want to remove the associations of one or more non archetype commodity, you should select the
commodities and select the Remove Commodity Archetype option from the Actions menu. N4 prompts with a popup window with Yes and No options where you have to select Yes to remove the associations. When you try to remove
an archetype commodity of a master (archetype) commodity itself, N4 ignores this action and does not raise any
warning or error. Whenever you remove the associations, N4 sends the updates to XPS.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
177
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Cancel a break-bulk gate transaction
5.1.2 Cancel a break-bulk gate transaction
N4 allows you to cancel the completed gate transaction.
To cancel the gate transaction:
1. In the Gate Transactions view, select the required gate transaction and select Actions
Transaction.
Cancel Truck
N4 prompts you to confirm the cancelation. However, if you use cancel reason codes or if at least one of the
selected gate transaction(s) is a delivery gate transaction with a handled time, the Cancel Truck Transaction form
appears.
2. Select a code from the Cancel Reasons drop-down list. If you selected more than one gate transaction, N4 applies
the same selected code to all of the selected gate transactions.
3. Clicking Yes cancels the truck transaction.
After canceling the truck transaction:
N4 resets the Quantity of the selected cargo lot to what it was before creating the gate transaction. In addition, it
purges the cargo units created as part of the gate transaction.
• The Status column is updated as CANCEL in the Gate Transactions view
• The T-State column is updated as yard in the Cargo Lots and Units views.
• Records the following event against the Unit record:
▪ UNIT_BRING_BACK_INTO_YARD
5.1.3 Configure Holds/Permissions to prevent break-bulk
cargo events from being recorded
N4 allows you to configure holds/permissions for the cargo unit associated with a cargo lot to prevent move actions,
such as load and unload, to be performed on a cargo lot. In addition, when you move cargo lots from one location to
another, either entirely or partially, N4 also transfers the holds/permissions to the new location. For more information,
see Transferring Cargo Holds/Permissions (on page 109) in the online help or on the NCC.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
178
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Configure Holds/Permissions to prevent break-bulk cargo events from being recorded
Since most of the cargo Actions record events against the associated cargo unit, you must create the Holds/
Permissions for the Unit entity and not the Cargo Lot entity.
You can use the History, Events tab in the Unit Inspector of the unit associated with a cargo lot to view the events
recorded for the Unit entity. For a complete list of cargo-related events, see Cargo Holds/Permissions (on page 108).
To configure holds/permissions for cargo events:
1. Use the Hold/Permission Type form to add a hold/permission for the Unit entity.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
179
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk cargo
2. Use the Service Business Rule form to add a service business rule for the hold/permission added in step 1 above.
3. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96), select a cargo lot that you want to load on a vessel and that has a unit
associated with it.
You cannot select a default cargo lot.
4. Double-click the cargo record to open the Cargo Lot Inspector (on page 101).
5. In the Holds/Perms tab, click
.
6. In the Update Hold/Permission form:
a. Select the Add Hold Action.
b. Select the hold/permission that you created in step 1 above.
c. Click OK.
N4 displays the hold as Active in the Holds/Perms tab.
If you now try to load this cargo lot (on page 126) on a vessel, N4 displays the following error:
Event type 'CARGO_LOAD' can not be applied to 'Unit:<Unit Number>'. Hold <Hold/Permission ID> exists on '<Unit
Number>.
5.1.4 Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk
cargo
N4 provides three PIN related business tasks that you can configure for the Deliver Break-Bulk (DB) gate transaction
type. You can use these business tasks to reject gate transactions based on the PIN associated with the Delivery
Order, bill of lading, and the gate transaction.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
180
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk cargo
The three business tasks are:
• RejectPinNbrNotEntered
• RejectPinNbrMismatch
• RejectPinNbrNotAssigned
The following table displays the expected result when you include the three business tasks in your gate configuration
and whether you specify a Delivery Order (DO) or Bill of Lading (BL) at the gate.
DO entered at
the Gate
PIN
associated
with DO
BL entered at
the Gate
PIN
associated
with BL
PIN entered at
the Gate
Expected
Result
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Incorrect PIN
Throws an error
that the PIN
does not match
the PIN
associated with
the DO.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
PIN matches
the DO PIN
No error.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Incorrect PIN
Throws an error
that the PIN
does not match
the PIN
associated with
the DO.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PIN matches
the DO PIN
No error.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Incorrect PIN
Throws an error
that the PIN
does not match
the PIN
associated with
the BL.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
PIN matches
the BL PIN
No error.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
181
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
DO entered at
the Gate
PIN
associated
with DO
Cargo How Do I...
Enter cargo lot Quantity for truck loads
BL entered at
the Gate
PIN
associated
with BL
PIN entered at
the Gate
Expected
Result
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
No
NA
Yes
No
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
No
NA
Yes
No
Yes
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
No
NA
Yes
Yes
Incorrect PIN
Throws an error
that the PIN
does not match
the PIN
associated with
the BL.
No
NA
Yes
Yes
PIN matches
the BL PIN
No error.
Yes
No
No
NA
No
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not entered.
Yes
No
No
NA
Yes
Throws an error
that the PIN is
not assigned.
Yes
Yes
No
NA
Incorrect PIN
Throws an error
that the PIN
does not match
the PIN
associated with
the DO.
Yes
Yes
No
NA
PIN matches
the DO PIN
No error.
5.1.5 Enter cargo lot Quantity for truck loads
You can enter the cargo lot Quantity in the Quantity field on the Validate Load screen after proceeding from the N4
Mobile Cargo Inventory program Truck Load screen. You cannot enter the cargo lot Quantity on the Truck Load
screen, nor can you customize the variform to add a Quantity field to that screen.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
182
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile
5.1.6 Extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile
To extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile, you can customize the RdtCustomGroovyImpl.groovy Groovy Plugin. See the
N4 SDK for more information.
5.1.7 Prevent delivering a cargo quantity greater than
what's specified in the cargo delivery order
When using N4 Mobile Cargo to load cargo on a truck, by default you're able to specify a cargo quantity that's greater
than what's specified in the cargo delivery order. This occurs either when selecting Cargo inventory Truck Load or
Cargo Lots Right click on the Cargo Lot Load Load Truck.
To prevent a N4 Mobile Cargo user from completing a gate transaction if they enter a quantity that is more than what is
specified in the cargo delivery order, include the RejectCargoRequestedNotFound business task in your Deliver
Break-Bulk (DB) gate transaction configuration.
5.1.8 Prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing
cargo lots for another facility in the complex
The Cargo Lots view (on page 96) displays all the cargo lots that exist in N4 and fall within the Horizon (days).
However, you can prevent the users logged in at one facility from viewing the cargo lots for another facility in the
complex.
To prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing cargo lots that exist at other facilities within the
complex:
1. In the Roles view, create a new role or edit an existing role to include the Cargo Lot - Deny Unfiltered view
(CARGO_LOT_DENY_UNFILTERED_VIEW) privilege.
This privilege is applicable only if the user has at least the Cargo Lot - View privilege to access the Cargo
Lots view.
2. In the Users view, assign the role that you created/edited in step 1 to the users who should not have the permission
to view the cargo lots for other facilities.
3. In the Cargo Lots view (on page 96):
a. Define a filter that restricts the records displayed in the list view based on the Inbound BL Item Vessel Visit
Facility field.
b. Save the filter and associate the user role (created/edited in step 1), for which you want to restrict the access,
with the saved filter. For more information, see Saving the list view as a filter in Navis N4: Basics.
Now, when users with the new role log into N4, they can view only the cargo lots filtered by the facility at which they are
logged in. In addition, they cannot see the following options in the Saved Filter menu in the Cargo Lots view:
• Save table view as filter
• Delete current filter
• --
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
183
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Prevent getting same bill of lading (BL) in the same Complex
5.1.9 Prevent getting same bill of lading (BL) in the same
Complex
Problem:
Customer has multiple facilities in the same complex. Data for a transshipment container arrives at Facility A through a
BAPLIE and COPRAR-d with BL 12345. However, customer receives error saying that BL does not match the vessel
visit because the BL is already in N4.
Solution:
Set CGOCargoValidation004 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_CARRIER_VISIT) (on page 40) to false at the Complex scope
level. This will prevent N4 from validating the carrier visit for the unit against the carrier visit for the BL.
5.1.10 Print barcode labels for the cargo arriving by truck
You can use the existing gate ticket printing mechanism to print barcode labels for the cargo arriving at the terminal by
truck. N4 provides a sample XSL file that you can edit and import into a document type for printing barcode labels.
The XSL can only be used with postscript printers. For non-postscript printers, you must consult the printer
manual and edit the XSL accordingly.
To set up the printer and document type:
1. Use the Printers view
Printer form to configure a postscript printer.
2. Use the Consoles view
3. Use the Documents view
Console form to associate the printer with the appropriate console.
Document form to create a new document type and import the barcode XSL.
4. Include the CreateDocument and the PrintDocument business tasks with the proper document types at the
appropriate gate stages for the Receive Break-Bulk (RB) gate transaction type.
When a user saves a Receive Break-Bulk (RB) gate transaction at the gate, the user gets the option of printing the
barcode label for the cargo arriving by the truck.
5.1.11 Process identified cargo lots using Gate API
If you want to process the identified cargo lots for the Receive Breakbulk transaction, you can use the submittransaction (pickup/appointment) Gate API available under the Argoservice Tester view. You must add the unit-id field
to the submit-transaction API to identify the cargo lots from N4.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
184
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Process identified cargo lots using Gate API
Below is a sample request of the submit-transaction (pickup/appointment) Gate API:
API Request:
<gate>
<submit-transaction>
<gate-id>GEN_CARGO</gate-id>
<stage-id>Ingate</stage-id>
<truck license-nbr="ATOL"/>
<truck-visit tvdtls-flex-string01="SEM01"/>
<truck-transaction tran-type="RB">
<cargo item-quantity="1" unit-id="LOT-1">
<bill-of-lading nbr="TEST" bl-item-nbr="ITM-01"/>
</cargo>
</truck-transaction>
</submit-transaction>
</gate>
When you post the above API, N4 processes the identified cargo lot ‘LOT-01’ for the Receive Breakbulk transaction.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
185
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Record a Billable Event Type for a Cargo Lot
5.1.12 Record a Billable Event Type for a Cargo Lot
Although N4 allows you to record service events for a cargo lot, these events are only for informational purposes. To
record billable events for cargo lots, you must use the B-Bulk unit associated with the cargo lot.
To define a billable event type for a cargo lot:
1. Enter an Id that uniquely identifies the event type.
2. Optionally, enter a brief Description of the event type.
3. From the Applies To drop-down list select Unit as the target entity for the event.
4. Select the Billable check box.
5. From the Functional Area lookup list, select Applicable to Cargo module.
6. Click Save.
If you select CargoLot from the Applies To drop-down list, the Billable check box is not applicable.
Although N4 does not display any error message, you cannot directly extract this event or include it in an
invoice.
To record a service event for a cargo lot:
1. In the Cargo Lots view, select the cargo lot for which you want to record the service event.
2. Select the Actions
Record Service Event option.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
186
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
Cargo How Do I...
Set up Inbound Cargo EDI Messages
3. In the Record Service Event form:
a. From the Event Type ID drop-down list, select the event type that you added.
The drop-down list displays all the event types, where either the Applies To field is set to CargoLot or the
Functional Area is set to Applicable to Cargo module.
b. Enter other applicable information, such as the Service Order Number, Quantity, and Quantity Unit, if
applicable.
c. Click OK.
If the selected unit applies to unit, N4 records the service event against the B-Bulk unit associated with the selected
cargo lot. You can view these events in the Unit Inspector History, Events tab for the unit. If the event type is
billable, from the Units view you can use the Query Charges action or extract the events to the Chargeable Units
Events view and use them to generate cargo-related invoices.
5.1.13 Set up Inbound Cargo EDI Messages
The Inbound EDI support for cargo focuses on the creation of cargo data using the BL, BL Item, and Cargo Lot
information. This information is further refined when you manifest, manufacture, or receive cargo at the gate. During
this process, a cargo lot is associated with a Unit and you can use the Unit to track cargo and to perform cargo
operations, such as load, unload, stuff, and strip.
You can set up the Inbound EDI message CUSCAR D 95B (Customs Cargo Report) to create and update cargo data,
such as BL, BL Item, and default cargo lots. As updates to the BL occur, N4 adjusts the BL Item quantity and the
associated default cargo lot.
In the EDI Session form, when you select Manifest as the EDI Message class, N4 enables the Extract button and the
Filter Criteria area on the form.
The Inbound EDI messages follow the current N4 method of Receive
Load
Classify
Map
Post.
Process a CUSCAR message
When you receive a CUSCAR message, N4 processes it as follows:
1. Finds or creates BL using the BL Number in the CNI segment.
2. For a given BL, finds and creates BL Items using the Item Number in the GID segment. For each BL Item, N4 also
creates a corresponding default Cargo Lot.
3. If the CUSCAR message contains information about a container in the SGP segment, N4 manifests the default
Cargo Lot to the container.
4. Uses the equipment details available in the CUSCAR message to update an existing unit or create a new unit.
5.1.14 Set up Outbound Cargo EDI Messages
The Outbound EDI support for cargo focuses on extracting the cargo data from N4 and creating messages to send to
external systems.
N4 supports the cargo lot details only for outbound Manifest EDI messages.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
187
Part 5: Cargo How Do
I...
Cargo How Do I...
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities
In N4, you can:
• Create an EDI session where the Message Type = Manifest, Direction = Send, and the File Extension = XML. You
must also define filter criteria to specify the bills of lading to be included in the EDI message.
You can use the following fields to define the filter criteria:
▪ Agent
▪ BL Number
▪ Bond Trucking Company
▪ Bonded Destination
▪ Consignee
▪ Exam Status
▪ Inbond status
▪ Line operator
▪ Manifest Seq Number
▪ Port of Discharge
▪ Port of Load
▪ Second Port of Discharge
▪ Shipper
▪ Vessel Visit
▪ Vessel Visit Phase
• Schedule the EDI session as an EDI Job.
The Outbound EDI messages follow the current N4 method of Select
Extract
Map
Unload
Send.
5.1.15 Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when
you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities
You can use the CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN) (on page 40) setting to determine whether to merge or
move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical commodities.
By default, N4 merges the BL items if you re-consign one BL to another BL with matching commodity.
If you override this setting, N4 moves the BL items from one BL to the other BL with matching commodity.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
188
Part 5: Cargo How Do
I...
Cargo How Do I...
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities
This setting is applicable only for identified cargo lots. You can use the Identified Lots tab (on page 71) in the
Bill of Lading Item form to add or edit identified cargo lots.
Merge BL Items
Consider there are two BL items, BL123 and BL124 with quantity 1 each and identical commodity 'CAR'.
Follow these steps to merge two BL items:
1. Double-click the CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN) (on page 40) setting in the Settings view and in the
Edit Configuration form ensure that the MOVE_ITEMS_IDENTIFIED_CARGO option is excluded by default.
2. Select the BL item, BL123 from the Bills of Lading view.
3. Select the Bill of Lading Inspector
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Items tab. The BL items are displayed.
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
189
Part 5: Cargo How Do
I...
Cargo How Do I...
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities
4. Select the item and click Actions Re-consign BL. The BL Item Re-consign BL form (on page 72) is displayed.
5. Enter the BL Number, BL124 in the form.
6. Click Save.
7. Select the BL item, BL124 from the Bills of Lading view.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
190
Part 5: Cargo How Do
I...
Cargo How Do I...
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities
8. Select the Bill of Lading Inspector Items tab. There will be one BL item with quantity 2.
Move BL Items
Follow these steps to move the BL item from one BL to another BL:
1. Double-click the CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN) (on page 40) setting in the Settings view and in the
Edit Configuration form, click Override and include the MOVE_ITEMS_IDENTIFIED_CARGO option.
2. Follow steps 2 to 7 mentioned in the earlier procedure.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
191
Part 5: Cargo How Do I...
3. Select the Bill of Lading Inspector
Cargo How Do I...
Create invoice for multiple cargo lots using the 'generate-invoice-request' API
Items tab. Two BL items with quantity 1 each are displayed.
5.1.16 Create invoice for multiple cargo lots using the
'generate-invoice-request' API
N4 Billing allows you to specify additional parameters for an invoice type using the filter criteria. If you have specified
the Equipment ID as one of the parameters while creating the filter criteria for an invoice type, use the is one of (in)
operator to specify multiple cargo lots. When you do this and generate a invoice using the generate-invoice-request
API, N4 Billing creates an invoice for all the cargo lots specified for the <EquipmentId> tag.
For information about the operators listed in the drop-down list, see Using operators in the online help or on the NCC.
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
192
Index
Index
Cargo Lot ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A
Add damages to a cargo lot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cargo Lot Identified form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Adjust Cargo Lot Quantity form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cargo Lot Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Assign Commodity Archetype form. . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cargo Lot Inspector Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Associate/Disassociate a non-archetype commodity
with/from the archetype commodity. . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cargo Lots Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cargo Lots tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cargo Lots view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
B
Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Bill of Lading Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Bill of Lading Inspector Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Bill of Lading Item form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Bill of Lading Release form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
Bill of Lading settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Bill of Lading Units form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Bills of Lading Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Bills of Lading Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
Bills of Lading view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
BL Item Re-consign BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
BL Releases tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
BL Releases Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cargo Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cargo Manifest To Container form. . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cargo Manifest To Rail form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cargo Manifest To Vessel form. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
Cargo Move form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cargo Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cargo Overview and Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Cargo Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Cargo Re-consign BL from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cargo Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cargo Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cargo Setup and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cargo Split BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cargo Strip form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
C
Cancel a break-bulk gate transaction. . . . . . . . . . 178
Cargo Stuff form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cancel Cargo Lot Manifest form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cargo Transload form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
Cancel Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cargo Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
Cargo Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CARGO_DAMAGE event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cargo Damage Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
CFS Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Cargo Damage Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CGOCargoRelease001
(RELEASE_BY_QTY_FLAGTYPE). . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cargo Damage Types Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cargo Damage Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Cargo De-Ramp form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cargo De-Van form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
Cargo Discharge form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
Cargo Holds/Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cargo How Do I.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 176
Cargo Identify form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cargo Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cargo Inventory Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Cargo Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
126
CGOCargoValidation001 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_LINE).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CGOCargoValidation002 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POD).
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CGOCargoValidation003 (MATCH_BL_UNIT_POL). .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CGOCargoValidation004
(MATCH_BL_UNIT_CARRIER_VISIT). . . . . . . . .
40
CGORECONSIGN001 (ON_RECONSIGN). . . . . . 40
Commodities Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Commodities view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
193
Index
Commodity form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Commodity icon reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Configure Holds/Permissions to prevent break-bulk
cargo events from being recorded. . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configure PIN related business tasks for break-bulk
cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Extend Cargo features in N4 Mobile. . . . . . . . . .
183
F
Fire Code form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
G
Contact Details form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Gate Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
General Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Contacts Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Copy Bill of Lading form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Grant Permission form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Create Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
Create invoice for multiple cargo lots using the
'generate-invoice-request' API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
45
H
Hazard Fire Code Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Hazard Fire Code view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Create Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Hazard Placard form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
25
Hazard Placards Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Damages form (Cargo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Hazard Placards view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Damages tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Hazardous Goods Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Damages Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Hazardous Goods form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete damages recorded for a cargo lot. . . . . . . 145
Hazardous Goods Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Delivery Order Address form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hazardous Goods Inspector Columns. . . . . . . . . . 35
Delivery Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hazardous Goods view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery Order Inspector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History, Event Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
33
32
92, 103, 76
Delivery Order Inspector Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
History, Events tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 105, 79
Delivery Order Item form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Delivery Order Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Holds/Permissions for Strip and Stuff actions. . . 117,
120
Delivery Orders Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Holds/Perms tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 80
Delivery Orders view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Holds/Perms Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 76
Details pane in the Bill of Lading Inspector. . . . . .
78
Details pane in the Cargo Lot Inspector. . . . . . . . 104
Details pane in the Deliver Order Inspector. . . . . . 94
Details pane in the Hazardous Goods Inspector. . 35
Discharge Vessel - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . 159
Discharge Vessel - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
I
Identified Lots tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Identify Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Identify Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . .
171
Identify Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Identify Cargo - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Inspect - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
E
115
Inspect - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Enter cargo lot Quantity for truck loads. . . . . . . . 182
Inspect - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Edit Cargo Lot form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
INVBL001 (TRUE_BILLS_OF_LADING). . . . . . . . 39
INVBL002
(BILLS_OF_LADING_FOR_ALL_IMPORT_EMPTIES)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
194
Index
INVMOBILE_RDT005
(MOBILE_CARGO_INVENTORY_POPULATE_QTY)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Prevent delivering a cargo quantity greater than
what's specified in the cargo delivery order. . . . . 183
Prevent getting same bill of lading (BL) in the same
Complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Item Split BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Items tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Prevent users logged in at one facility from viewing
cargo lots for another facility in the complex. . . . 183
Items Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Print barcode labels for the cargo arriving by truck. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
L
Load Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . 161
Process identified cargo lots using Gate API. . . . 184
Load Cargo - Matching Visits form. . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Product Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Product Types Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Load Cargo - Select Cargo To Load form. . . . . . . 160
Product Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Cargo - Validate Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Load Vessel - Load form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
30
R
Rail Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Load Vessel - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rail Load - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Load Vessel - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Rail Load - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rail Load - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
M
Manifest Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rail UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Manufacture Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record a Billable Event Type for a Cargo Lot. . .
135
186
Record Damages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Merge or move the Bill of Lading (BL) items when you
re-consign one BL to another BL with identical
commodities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Record Damages - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . 173
Record Damages - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Move Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Move Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . 174
Record Damages - Validate Record Damage form. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Move Cargo - Quantity and Position form. . . . . .
Record Service Event form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Move Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
79
Record Service Event form (Cargo Lot). . . . . . . . 105
Reference Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
N
ROADGATE034 (CARGO_BL_LOV_FILTER). . . . 41
N4 Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
N4 Mobile Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
N4 Mobile Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
S
Service Order form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Set up Inbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . . 187
O
Order Item tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Order Items Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Other Cargo Privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Set up Outbound Cargo EDI Messages. . . . . . . . 187
Special Stow form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
Special Stows Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Special Stows view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Strip - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
P
29
Strip - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Package Types Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Strip - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Package Types view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Strip Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 65
Stuff - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pre-Advised Cargo Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Stuff - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Pre-Advised Cargo view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Stuff - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Package Type form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
195
Index
Stuff Cargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Subsidiary Risk form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Subsidiary Risks tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Subsidiary Risks Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
T
Transferring Cargo Holds/Permissions. . . . . . . .
109
Truck Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Truck UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
U
Units tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 73
Units Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
UnLoad Cargo - Matching BL form. . . . . . . . . . . . 163
UnLoad Cargo - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . 163
UnLoad Cargo - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
UnLoad Cargo - Select Cargo To UnLoad form. . 163
UnLoad Cargo - Validate Unload form. . . . . . . . . 163
Unload Rail - Matching Cargo form. . . . . . . . . . . 168
Unload Rail - Search form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Unload Rail - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Update damages recorded for a cargo lot. . . . . . 145
Update Hold/Permission form. . . . . . . . . . . .
81, 107
V
Vessel Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Vessel UnLoad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Vessel UnLoad - Validate form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
X
xpscacheCARGO001 (CARGO_XPS). . . . . . . . . . 41
Published: Monday, April 12, 2021
Confidential -- Proprietary
Navis N4 3.6.34: Cargo Manual Administrator and User Guide
196